Cover1,4

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with a dry cloth. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

9.

For the U.K. WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE. GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

About WARNING and CAUTION Notices About the Symbols
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger. The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled. The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly. Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly. * Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets.

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING

001-50 008a

Connect mains plug of this model to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.

The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described as marked on the bottom of unit.

......................................................................................................................
002a

......................................................................................................................
008e

Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the unit.

......................................................................................................................
003

Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device. Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards! This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist. Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.

......................................................................................................................
009

Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it (except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page. Never install the unit in any of the following locations. Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are Exposed to steam or smoke; or are Subject to salt exposure; or are Humid; or are Exposed to rain; or are Dusty or sandy; or are Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness. Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

......................................................................................................................
010

......................................................................................................................
004

......................................................................................................................
011

......................................................................................................................
007

......................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

012a

101a

Immediately turn the power off, remove the power cord from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page when: The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or If smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit; or The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become wet); or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance. In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit. Protect the unit from strong impact. (Do not drop it!)

The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.

......................................................................................................................
102b

Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. At regular intervals, you should unplug the power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire. Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children. Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.

......................................................................................................................
103a

......................................................................................................................
013

......................................................................................................................
104

......................................................................................................................
014

......................................................................................................................
106

......................................................................................................................
015

Do not force the units power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cordsthe total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cords outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through. Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page. Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth. Never expose Lithium Battery to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

......................................................................................................................
107b

Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices. Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 24).

......................................................................................................................
108a

......................................................................................................................
016

......................................................................................................................
109a

......................................................................................................................
026

......................................................................................................................
110a

Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet. Should you remove the screws from the bottom panel of the unit, keep them in a safe place out of childrens reach, so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally.

......................................................................................................................
118a

......................................................................................................................
027

......................................................................................................................

......................................................................................................................

IMPORTANT NOTES
Power Supply
301

Maintenance
401a

Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet. Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices. Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cords plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible.

For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, nonabrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.

402

307

Repairs and Data

452

308

Please be aware that all data contained in the units memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be backed up on a DATA card, in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer), or written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

Memory Backup
501b

Placement
351

Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference. This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers. Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them off. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit. When moved from one location to another where the temperature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated. Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface. You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally.
552

352a

352b

This unit contains a battery which powers the units memory circuits while the main power is off. When this battery becomes weak, the message shown below will appear in the display. Once you see this message, have the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in memory. To have the battery replaced, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page. Backup Battery Low!

Additional Precautions
551

354a

355b

Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the units memory on a DATA card, or in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer). Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in the units memory, on a DATA card, or in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions. Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.

553

360

554

IMPORTANT NOTES

556

707

When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itselfnever pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cables internal elements. A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation. To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night). This instrument is designed to minimize the extraneous sounds produced when its played. However, since sound vibrations can be transmitted through floors and walls to a greater degree than expected, take care not to allow these sounds to become a nuisance to neighbors, especially when performing at night and when using headphones. When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging materials. Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.

This units CompactFlash card slot accepts CompactFlash CompactFlash cards. Microdrive storage media are not compatible. CompactFlash cards are constructed using precision components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to the following. To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity, be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards. Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the cards. Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or vibration. Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85C). Do not allow cards to become wet. Do not disassemble or modify the cards.

708

557

558a

558d

559a

930

562

Never insert or remove a CompactFlash card while this units power is on. Doing so may corrupt the units data or the data on the CompactFlash card.

985

Before Using Cards

Using DATA Cards
704

The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.

Carefully insert the DATA card all the way inuntil it is firmly in place.

234

CompactFlash and
235

are trademarks of SanDisk

Corporation and licensed by CompactFlash association. Roland Corporation is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlashTM and CF logo (
236 CompactFlash

) trademarks.

Fugue 2009 Kyoto Software Research, Inc. All rights reserved.

705

Never touch the terminals of the DATA card. Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty.

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (p. 3), USING THE UNIT SAFELY (p. 4), and IMPORTANT NOTES (p. 6). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owners manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference. Copyright 2009 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY................................................................................... 4 IMPORTANT NOTES........................................................................................... 6 Features ...........................................................................................................13 Panel Descriptions ..........................................................................................16
Top Panel ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16 Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19

Getting Ready..................................................................................................20
Mounting the TD-20X on the Stand.......................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting the Pads ...................................................................................................................................................... 21 Connecting Headphones, Audio Equipment ........................................................................................................ 23 Turning On/Off the Power ............................................................................................................................................ 24 Adjusting the Volume .................................................................................................................................................... 25 Making Hi-hat (VH-12) Settings .................................................................................................................................. 25 Adjusting Mesh Head Tension (PD-125XS/125X/105X)..................................................................................... 25 Adjusting the Display Contrast ................................................................................................................................... 26 Listening to the Demo Songs...................................................................................................................................... 26

Overview..........................................................................................................28
Basic Operation................................................................................................................................................................. 28 Changing a Value.............................................................................................................................................. 28 Choosing a Pad to Edit.................................................................................................................................... 29 Using The Group Faders (GROUP FADERS/[FADER]) ........................................................................... 30 Turning the Click On/Off ................................................................................................................................ 30 Changing the Tempo ([TEMPO]) ................................................................................................................. 30 About Memory.................................................................................................................................................................. 31 Playing Methods............................................................................................................................................................... 32 Pad (PD-125XS/125X/105X) .......................................................................................................................... 32 Hi-Hat (VH-12) .................................................................................................................................................... 33 Cymbal (CY-15R/14C) ...................................................................................................................................... 33 Positional Sensing ............................................................................................................................................ 34 Basic Structure .................................................................................................................................................................. 34 Main Functions (Terminology)..................................................................................................................... 35 Convenient Functions.................................................................................................................................................... 37

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT].................................................................39

Choosing a Drum Kit....................................................................................................................................................... 39 About the DRUM KIT Screen ..................................................................................................................... 39 Selecting a Drum Kit from the List [F1 (LIST)] ........................................................................................................ 39 Making Settings for Each Drum Kit [F2 (FUNC)].................................................................................................... 40 Adjusting the Volume [F1 (VOLUME)] ....................................................................................................... 40 Assigning a Tempo for Each Kit [F2 (TEMPO)]........................................................................................ 40 Playing Brushes [F3 (BRUSH)] ....................................................................................................................... 40 Turning the Pad Pattern Function On/Off [F4 (PAD PTN)]................................................................. 40 Viewing the Output Level (OUPUT MONITOR) [F5 (MONITOR)] ...................................................... 41 Naming a Drum Kit [F3 (NAME)] ................................................................................................................................. 41 Playing Cross Stick [F5 (XSTICK)] ................................................................................................................................ 41

Contents

Copying a Drum Kit ......................................................................................................................................................... 42 Copying Fifty Drum Kits at a Time .............................................................................................................. 42 Specifying the Order in Which Drum Kits will be Recalled [CHAIN] .............................................................. 43 Creating a Drum Kit Chain............................................................................................................................. 43 Naming a Drum Kit Chain [F5 (NAME)] ..................................................................................................... 44 Copying a Drum Kit Chain ............................................................................................................................. 44 Using a Drum Kit Chain................................................................................................................................... 45

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]...........................................................46

Choosing a Pad to Edit................................................................................................................................................... 46 Lock the Pad You are Editing (EDIT LOCK)............................................................................................... 46 Assign an Instrument to a Pad .................................................................................................................................... 46 Selecting an Instrument from the List [F1 (LIST)] ................................................................................................. 47 Editing Drum Sounds [F2 (EDIT)]................................................................................................................................ 48 Editing Acoustic Drum Sounds (V-EDIT)................................................................................................... 48 Editing Other Instruments............................................................................................................................. 48 Editing Procedure............................................................................................................................................. 48 Using Pads/Pedal as Controllers [F3 (CONTROL)]................................................................................................. 52 Playing a Pattern by Hitting a Pad (Pad Pattern) [F1 (PATTERN)].................................................... 52 Using the Hi-Hat Pedal to Change an Instruments Pitch [F2 (PDLBEND)] .................................. 52 Enabling/Disabling Tonal Change Controlled by Strike Position or Rim Shot Nuance [F3 (POSI)] ............................................................................................................................................................ 53 Making MIDI Settings for Each Pad [F5 (MIDI)] ...................................................................................... 53 Copying an Instrument.................................................................................................................................................. 54 Copying a Set of Multiple Instruments ..................................................................................................... 55

Chapter 3. Mixer Settings ...............................................................................56

Setting the Volume and Pan of Each Pad [MIXER] ............................................................................................... 56 Editing with the Group Faders (MIX EDIT) ............................................................................................... 56 Copying Mixer Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 57

Chapter 4. Effect Settings ...............................................................................58

Turning Effects On/Off [EFFECTS SWITCH] ............................................................................................................. 58 Adjusting Volume Change and Tone [COMP/EQ]................................................................................................ 59 Adjusting the Volume Change (Compressor) [F2 (COMP)] ............................................................... 59 Adjusting the Tone (Equalizer) [F3 (EQ)] .................................................................................................. 60 Turning the Compressor/Equalizer On/Off for Each Pad ................................................................... 60 Type of Acoustics for the Room (Ambience) [AMBIENCE] ................................................................................ 60 Auditioning the Ambience Effect [F5 (AMB MON)].............................................................................. 61 Applying Effects to the Sound (Multi-Effects) [MULTI EFFECTS]..................................................................... 62 Auditioning the Multi-Effects [F5 (AMB MON)]...................................................................................... 62 Multi-Effects Parameters................................................................................................................................ 63 Adjusting the Overall Sound [MASTER COMP/EQ] .............................................................................................. 65 Using the Master Comp/EQ .......................................................................................................................... 65 Turning the Master Comp/EQ Switch On/Off......................................................................................... 65 Editing the Master Comp/EQ Settings ...................................................................................................... 66 Gain Reduction Meter and Output Meter................................................................................................ 66 Restoring the Settings to Their Default Values ...................................................................................... 66 Copying Effect Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 68

Contents

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer......................................................69

Basic Operation................................................................................................................................................................. 69 Choosing a Pattern [PATTERN].................................................................................................................................... 70 About the PATTERN screen ....................................................................................................................... 70 Selecting a Pattern from the List [F1 (LIST)] ........................................................................................................... 70 Playing Back a Pattern [PLAY]...................................................................................................................................... 71 Making Settings for Each Part [F2 (PART)]............................................................................................................... 71 Muting a Specific Part [F1 (MUTE)] ............................................................................................................. 71 Specifying the Instruments for the Backing Parts [F2 (BACKING)].................................................. 72 Tuning Settings for the Backing Parts (Master Tuning) ...................................................................... 72 Percussion Part Settings [F3 (PERC)] .......................................................................................................... 73 Percussion Set Settings .................................................................................................................................. 73 Setting the Volume and Pan of Each Part [F4 (MIXER)]....................................................................... 76 Applying Reverb/Chorus to the Backing Parts [F5 (REV/CHO)]........................................................ 77 Making Settings for a User Pattern [F3 (FUNC)] .................................................................................................... 77 Specifying the Number of Measures, Time Signature, and Tempo [F1 (SETUP)] ...................... 77 Specifying the Playback Type [F2 (TYPE)] ................................................................................................ 78 Naming a Pattern [F5 (NAME)]..................................................................................................................... 79 Specifying the Tempo [TEMPO].................................................................................................................................. 79 Setting the Tempo by Hitting a Pad (Tap Tempo) [F3 (TAP)]............................................................ 80 Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device [F2 (SYNC)] .................................................................. 80 Starting and Stopping the Metronome (Click) On/Off [F5] ............................................................... 81 Viewing the Tempo as a Blinking Button [F4] ........................................................................................ 81 Making Click Settings [F1 (CLICK)].............................................................................................................. 81

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer ............................83

Recording a Pattern [REC]............................................................................................................................................. 83 How to Record ................................................................................................................................................... 83 Checking the Tones and Phrases During Recording (Rehearsal) .................................................... 85 Editing a Pattern [F4 (EDIT)] ......................................................................................................................................... 85 Copying a Pattern [F1 (COPY)] ..................................................................................................................... 86 Connecting Two Patterns [F2 (APPEND)]................................................................................................. 87 Erasing a Pattern [F3 (ERASE)] ...................................................................................................................... 87 Deleting a Pattern [F4 (DELETE)] ................................................................................................................. 88 Saving a Pattern [F5 (CARD)]........................................................................................................................................ 89 Saving a Pattern to a CompactFlash Card [F1 (SAVE)]......................................................................... 89 Loading a Pattern from a CompactFlash Card [F2 (LOAD)]............................................................... 90 Deleting a Pattern from a CompactFlash Card [F3 (DELETE)]........................................................... 90

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD] .............................................91

Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD] ........................................................................................................................... 91 Saving Data to a CompactFlash Card [F1 (SAVE)]................................................................................................. 92 Naming a Backup [F4 (NAME)]..................................................................................................................... 92 Loading Data from a CompactFlash Card [F2 (LOAD)]....................................................................................... 93 Loading TD-20 Backup Data [F3 (IMPORT)] ............................................................................................................ 93 Deleting Data from a CompactFlash Card [F4 (DELETE)]................................................................................... 94 Formatting a CompactFlash Card [F1 (FORMAT)] ................................................................................................ 94 Checking the State of a CompactFlash Card [F2 (INFO)] ................................................................................... 95

10

Contents

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER] ....................................96

Selecting the Pad Type [F1 (BANK)]........................................................................................................................... 96 Trigger Inputs and Playing Methods Corresponding Chart.............................................................. 97 Pad Sensitivity Settings [F2 (BASIC)] ......................................................................................................................... 97 Adjusting the Pad Sensitivity (Sensitivity) ............................................................................................... 98 Adjusting the Pads Minimum Sensitivity (Threshold)........................................................................ 98 Specifying How Volume Responds to Velocity (Velocity Curve) ..................................................... 98 Hi-Hat Settings [F3 (HI-HAT)] ....................................................................................................................................... 99 Settings for the VH-12..................................................................................................................................... 99 Settings for the VH-11...................................................................................................................................100 Settings for the FD-8......................................................................................................................................100 Eliminate Crosstalk Between Pads [F4 (XTALK)] .................................................................................................101 Advanced Trigger Parameters [F5 (ADVANCE)]..................................................................................................102 Detailed Settings for Trigger Signal Detection [F1 (SCAN)] ............................................................102 Detailed Settings for Rim Shots [F2 (RIM)].............................................................................................104 Settings for Separate Triggering of Ride Strikes [F3 (3-WAY)]........................................................105 Strike Position Detection On/Off [F4 (POSI)].........................................................................................105 Naming a Trigger Bank [F5 (Name)] ........................................................................................................................106 Copying a Trigger Bank ...............................................................................................................................................106

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP].....................................108

Output Assignments [F2 (OUTPUT)] .......................................................................................................................108 Example Settings ............................................................................................................................................109 Assigning a Function to a Footswitch or Pad [F3 (CONTROL)]......................................................................110 Assigning a Function to a Footswitch [F1 (FOOT SW)]......................................................................110 Using Pads as Switches [F2 (PAD SW)] ....................................................................................................111 Other Settings [F4 (OPTION)].....................................................................................................................................112 Specifying the Preview Velocity [F1 (PREVIEW)]..................................................................................112 Making the Master Comp/EQ Settings Identical for All Kits [F2 (COMP/EQ)] ...........................112 Using the MIX IN Jacks as Two Monaural Inputs [F3 (MIX IN)] .......................................................113 Adjusting the Display Contrast [F5 (LCD)] .............................................................................................113 Restoring the Factory Settings [F5 (F RESET)]......................................................................................................114

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings.............................................................................115

About MIDI .......................................................................................................................................................................115 About MIDI Connectors................................................................................................................................115 MIDI Channel Settings [F1 (MIDI CH)].....................................................................................................................115 MIDI Channel Settings for the Entire TD-20X [F2 (GLOBAL)]..........................................................................116 Playing an External MIDI Sound Module from Another MIDI Controller (Soft Through) .....116 Recording the Pad Performance on an External Sequencer (Local Control) ............................117 Setting the Device ID.....................................................................................................................................117 MIDI Settings for V-LINK ...............................................................................................................................118 MIDI Message Settings for Detailed Performance Expression [F3 (CTRL)] ................................................118 Specifying the Drum Kits Recalled by Program Changes [F4 (PROG)]........................................................119 Saving Data to an External MIDI Device (Bulk Dump) [F5 (BULK)] ...............................................................119

11

Contents

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS] .........................................................121

Playing a Kit from the CompactFlash without Loading It (Kit Selection) [F1 (KIT SEL)]........................121 Copying the Drum Kit Chosen in Kit Selection ....................................................................................122 Viewing the Output Level (OUPUT MONITOR) [F2 (OUT MON)] ...................................................................122 Viewing Trigger Information for Each Pad [F3 (TRG MON)]............................................................................123 Using the TD-20X to Control Images [F5 (V-LINK)] ............................................................................................123 What is V-LINK?................................................................................................................................................123 Using V-LINK .....................................................................................................................................................123 Viewing the Remaining Memory and the Program Version [F1 (INFO)] ....................................................125

Messages and Error Messages .....................................................................126 Preset Drum Kit List ......................................................................................128 Drum Instrument List....................................................................................131 Note Number (Factory Settings) ..................................................................137 Backing Instrument List................................................................................138 Preset Pattern List.........................................................................................140 MIDI Implementation Chart .........................................................................142 Block Diagram ...............................................................................................144 Specifications ................................................................................................146 Index...............................................................................................................147

12

Features
About the TD-20X
The TD-20X is the most advanced drum & percussion sound module in the world. (It is the same as a TD-20 with the TDW20 Expansion Board installed.)

A Rich and Wide Variety of Sounds

100 Different Drum Kits
The wide range of drum kits cover numerous musical styles, including raw-sounding acoustic drums, historical vintage drums finely tuned sounds, ambient sounds, percussion from around the world and processed, electronic sounds indispensable for todays club music. Some of the kits include pre-set Tap-Sequences that allow you to play pitched melodies and/or chords (p. 52). The 100 preset kits are the same as those of a TD-20 with the TD-20 Expansion board installed.

Superior Expression
Rolands COSM based Variable Drum Modeling technology produces the full dynamic range of the sounds being played, from the most gentle ghost notes to powerful rim shots. Positional sensing, cymbal chokes, cross-sticking on the snare and delicate buzz rolls are all possible. And of course you can play with brushes too (plastic only).

Dynamic Interval Control Function

This simulates the physical behavior of drums. Sounds will respond naturally, depending on variations in playing dynamics, speed and position. Snare Roll/Playing Position If you tap the head or play a roll and then move your sticks towards the edge of the head, you will notice the difference in sound. Smooth Response for Cymbal Edge Rolls If you want to play a dynamic cymbal roll that gradually crescendos, the sound will remain smooth and constant. Positional Sensing on the Ride Cymbal As with an acoustic cymbal, depending on where you play the sound will be different. Tap the cymbal near the center of the bow and gradually move towards the edge and you will notice less attack and the increased presence of the rich midlow frequencies.

920 Different Sounds (Instruments)

Even before you start customizing the sounds for your particular playing style or sonic needs, there is an amazing variety of sounds to work with. Acoustic Drum Sounds with Rich Presence Solid-sounding kick, snare, and tom sounds that wont get buried in the mix of your song. Cymbal sounds with rich resonance, presence and natural sustain. There are also stacked cymbals, splashes, and 10-inch snare drums for use as a sub-snare, etc. Processed & Electronic Sounds These include classic TR-808 and TR-909 sounds for hip-hop and club music, and electronic sounds that will change pitch depending on your playing dynamics (Dynamic Pitch Bend function, p. 51) Special Effect Sounds These include reverse cymbals, scratch sounds, claps and many special effects. Percussion Sounds These include a selection of world percussion like large gongs, cajon, Latin & African percussion and traditional Japanese drums. Sounds for Use with Drum Triggers (RT-10 series) Acoustic or processed sounds can be easily used to enhance an acoustic drum set equipped with triggers. The 920 instruments are the same as those of a TD-20 with the TD-20 Expansion board installed.

Natural Hi-Hat Response

Closed hi-hat dynamics, edge shot accents, and even loose half-open sounds are all reproduced faithfully, with the sound changing in a completely smooth way from closed to fully open. By detecting pedal position and speed of the pedal movement, very fast open-close-open movements are perfectly detected. Foot splash techniques can also be used with a very natural feel. When using the V-Hi-Hat VH-12, even the pressure of the two cymbals closing tighter will provide slight changes in the nuance of the sound, just like with an acoustic hi-hat (p. 33).

13

Features

Friendly User Interface

Access to all the editing parameters and operations is very simple and easy to understand. All functions are clearly illustrated in the display, with easy-to-understand icons to help with the editing process (V-Edit, etc.). TD-20X gives you superior control and allows you to easily customize the sounds to your specific needs.

Superior Triggering Response

Rolands advanced triggering system, which allows you to easily set the type of pad you are using, including all parameters, guarantees a very natural dynamic response, no matter what style of music you are performing. Previous models of Roland pads are compatible with the TD-20X. Please see the chart on page 96.

Sound Design Power!

Like with acoustic drums, you can tune, add muffling (mute), change the heads and even adjust the tension of the snares (or even turn them off). You can change the shell depths or the material of the snare drum shell. You can place sizzles on the cymbals, put a tambourine on the hi-hat, hand claps on the snare drum rim and much more. You can even adjust the overall kit resonance.

15 Trigger Inputs Allow Expansion Possibilities

As up to 15 pads can be connected, it is easy to add on extra pads to have more sounds available at once. You can also assign special functions to a pad such as switching drum kits, turning the snares on and off, setting the hi-hat to a fixed position, playing patterns etc. (Pad Switch, P.111, Pad Pattern, P.52).

Ambiences Designed and Tuned for Drums

There are 25 different room types to choose from. You can choose the wall material, room size and shape and even move the ambient microphones to further enhance the sound. This helps to create the perspective of listening to the drums from a different part of the room, or hearing the precise, finished sound quality like in a recording studio control room.

Playing with Brushes

You can play with brushes, using normal sweep techniques, but only if you are using the following pads as the snare drum. PD-125XS, PD-125X, PD-105X & PD-120 (P.40).

Professional Sound Processing

Each pad has an individual 3-band equalizer and a compressor. Theres also a multi-effect section providing reverb, flanger, chorus, delay, pitch shifter, phaser, overdrive, and ring modulator. You can virtually move the microphone on specific sounds as well as select the type microphone being used. And for the overall kit, theres a master compressor and master equalizer (P.65) that you can use to even further fine-tune the overall sound. All of these sound design tools are the same as what is found in professional recording or PA system consoles.

On Board Sequencer and Backing Instruments

The preset patterns contain four backing parts (262 instruments) and one percussion part, and the patterns have been selected to represent not just a variety of musical styles, but to give you an idea of what you can do with it, whether using for practice or performance purposes. By connecting a MIDI keyboard, you can create your own patterns.

14

Features

Optimized Functions for Stage or Studio

The master and headphone volume knobs are independent. The group faders allow quick volume adjustments even while you perform (P.30). The Drum Kit Chain function lets you play kits in any order you like. Perfect for live performances (P.43). Click and Tempo Functions You can set the metronome (click) sound to be output ONLY from the headphones for self monitoring (P.81). Each kit can have its own Kit Tempo setting, helpful as well in a live situation (P.40). The tempo Indicator led lets you verify the tempo silently (P.81). The tap Tempo function lets you set the tempo from a pad (P.80). Multiple Output Configurations By taking full advantage of Master Out L/R and Direct Outs 1 8, you can use a total of ten outputs. This is ideal for live or multi-track recording situations. The Master Out L/R, Phones, and Direct 7/8 can be used as three sets of stereo outputs. The Digital Out is a coaxial type, 44.1 kHz / 24-bit. MIX IN Jack (Stereo) The MIX IN has its own, independent volume control. You can choose between stereo and mono, or even mute just one of the channels. This is ideal for using with drum practice CDs (with the click in one channel, and the backing in the other channel) as well as personal monitoring needs (P.113).

Use CompactFlash Cards for Storing Data

Backup Functions
All of the TD-20Xs settings, including 100 drum kits, can be saved (backed up) on a CompactFlash card. Up to 99 sets of backup data (100 kits x 99 = 9900 kits) can be stored. This assures that you can always have backups of your favorite kits, that you might want to slightly change now and then. Backup data that was created on the TD-20 is compatible with the TD-20X, and can be imported into the TD-20X and used (P.93).

Kit Selection Function

The Kit Selection function allows you to play preset kits or kits that are saved on a CompactFlash card without having to load the drum kit into user memory (P.121).

Use the TD-20X As a MIDI Sound Module

You can use the TD-20X as a MIDI drum sound module. In addition to the drum kit section the TD-20X also has a full percussion set. The factory settings mean that the drum kit part uses MIDI channel 10 and the percussion part uses channel 11. You can assign and edit instruments to each note number from #0#127 of the percussion part.

15

Panel Descriptions
Top Panel
fig.top

17

18

19

3 20

4 7 8

6 9 10

11 12 21 23

13

14 15

22

16

24

1. Trigger Level Indicator

This lights up and moves each time a trigger signal is received from a pad. It monitors the pad connection and is helpful when customizing trigger parameters.

4. [CHAIN] Button
A Drum Kit Chain allows you to set up a customized order for playing your kits (p. 43).

5. [TOOLS] Button 2. Number Display

Displays the Kit number (currently selected drum kit). This button is used when you want to check various information (Output Monitor/Trigger Monitor), or when you want to use functions such as Kit Selection (p. 121).

3. Display
During normal performance, you see the kit name and other information. When editing, relative graphics and text will appear depending on the edit mode you are in.

6. [COPY] Button
Copy or exchange data between drum kits, instruments, etc. (p. 42, p. 44, p. 54, p. 57, p. 68, p. 75, p. 106).

16

Panel Descriptions

7. [CARD] Button
For access to a CompactFlash card functions such as saving/ loading data etc. (p. 91).

17. [MIX IN] Knob

Adjusts the level of the audio source connected to the MIX IN jack (p. 25).

8. [SETUP] Button
For access to functions that affect the TD-20X globally, such as MIDI parameters or Output Assign function etc. (p. 108).

18. [PHONES] Knob

Adjusts the headphone volume (p. 25). Plugging in headphones does not affect the master output (like other audio device).

9. [TRIGGER] Button
For access to trigger parameters (p. 96).

19. [MASTER] Knob

Adjusts the volume of the MASTER OUT jacks (p. 25).

10. [EXIT] Button

Press this to return to the previous screen. Repeated pressing takes you back to the DRUM KIT screen.

20. [CURSOR] Buttons

Used to move the cursor in the display (p. 28).

11. [F1][F5] Buttons (Function Buttons)

These buttons change their function depending on the contents of the display. The lower part of the display will indicate the function of each button (p. 28).

21. [VALUE] Dial

This dial functions like the [+] and [-] buttons. Use it to scroll quickly or make large changes in edited values (p. 28).

22. TRIG SELECT 12. [SHIFT] Button

Used in combination with other buttons. How this functions is explained in respective parts of this manual. Use the [1] and [15] buttons to select the trigger number (pad) you want to access. Press the [RIM] button to select the rim of a pad. (The [RIM] button lights (p. 29). If you press the [LOCK] button so its indicator is lit, the pad for which settings are being made will remain selected even if you strike a pad (p. 46).

13. GROUP FADERS

The faders are switchable, allowing you to adjust the volume of the kick, snare, toms, hi-hat, cymbals, percussion and backing instruments, and the click sound (p. 30).

23. [PREVIEW] Button

This velocity sensitive button allows you to audition an instrument after you have chosen it with the TRIG SELECT buttons or after you have played a pad/pedal (p. 29).

14. SEQUENCER
These provide access to and control of sequencer functions (pattern playback/recording, percussion set) etc. (p. 69, p. 83).

24. [-], [+] Buttons 15. DRUM KIT

Heres where to start when you want to perform operations related to drum kits, such as editing the instruments (p. 46), or making settings for things such as mixing (p. 56) or effects (p. 58). These buttons are used to switch drum kits or to change values when editing. The [+] button increases the value, and the [-] button decreases it (p. 28).

16. [KIT] Button

One touch brings you back to the basic display screen (p. 39).

17

Panel Descriptions

Rear Panel
fig.rear_50

4 1 2

11 3 7

1. [POWER] Switch
This switch turns the power on/off (p. 24). If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the [POWER] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).

6. MIX IN Jack
You can connect a CD player or portable audio player to this jack, or use it as a monitor input during your live performance. As the output destination of the sound being input from this jack, you can choose the MASTER OUT jacks, the PHONES jack, or DIRECT OUT 58 jacks (p. 108). Although the MIX IN jack is normally used as a stereo input, you are free to use it as two monaural inputs (p. 113).

2. AC IN
Connect the included AC power cable to this inlet. For details on the power consumption, refer to p. 146. The unit should be connected to a power source only of the type marked on the bottom of the unit.

7. FOOT SW Jack
Optional footswitches (such as BOSS FS-5U) give you access to a variety of functions like selecting drum kits, sequencer start/stop, etc. Using an optional PCS-31 cable (standard insert cable).

3. TRIGGER INPUT jacks

Use these jacks for connecting your pads to the TD-20X (p. 21). Use a stereo (TRS) cable if youre connecting a dual-trigger type pad.

8. DIRECT OUT jacks (unbalanced)

Connect these jacks if youre using an external mixer. You can make settings in SETUP to specify which of the DIRECT 18 jacks each instrument will be sent from (p. 108).

4. MIDI OUT/THRU Connector

For using the TD-20X pads to play sounds in an external MIDI sound module, or recording/saving data to an external MIDI sequencer (bulk dump; p. 115120).

9. MASTER OUT Jacks (unbalanced)

For connecting to your amp/audio system. For monaural output, use the MASTER OUT L/MONO jack.

10. DIGITAL OUT Connector 5. MIDI IN Connector

To connect an external MIDI source (sequencer, pad controller, keyboard, computer, etc.) to play the TD-20Xs sounds, or to load data (p. 115119). This coaxial-type digital out connector sends the same audio signal as is output from MASTER OUT jacks. Provides output of a 44.1 kHz, 24 bit version of the audio signal that is output from the MASTER OUT jack.

11. Security Slot (

For retail store use.

http://www.kensington.com/

18

Panel Descriptions

Front Panel
fig.front

1. PHONES Jack
A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to this jack. Connecting the headphones will not mute the output from the MASTER OUT jacks (p. 23).

2. CompactFlash Card Slot

Accepts a CompactFlash card (optional). Each CompactFlash card can store all settings of the TD-20X, such as drum kits and sequencer performance data, etc. (p. 91). The TD-20X supports 3.3V CompactFlash cards (Type I) in a range of 16 MB4 GB capacities.

Microdrives and other Type II cards cannot be used. Even if a card meets the requirements given above, it may not be usable in some cases depending on that particular cards design or the conditions of use. We cannot guarantee the operation of all cards that meet the above requirements.

19

Getting Ready
Mounting the TD-20X on the Stand
1. Attach the sound module mounting plate (included with the optional drum stand) to the TD-20X.
Using the four screws attached to the bottom panel, attach the holder so the unit is oriented as shown in the diagram. ONLY use the 12 mm screws (M5 x 12) provided with the TD-20X. Other screws may damage the unit.
fig.StandHolder.e

TD-20X

Sound module mounting plate Wide Narrow

When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of newspapers or magazines, and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls. Also, you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged. When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.

2. Mount the TD-20X and sound module mounting plate to the drum stand (such as the optional MDS-25).
See the owners manual for the stand for details on assembling the drum stand and mounting the TD-20X.
005

This unit should be used only with a stand that is recommended by Roland.
006

When using the unit with a stand recommended by Roland, the stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a stand, you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit, and keep it from wobbling.
101c

This TD-20X is designed for use only with Roland stand MDS series. Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability causing possible injury.

The optional APC-33 All Purpose Clamp can be attached to a pipe of 10.528.6 mm radius in case you want to mount the TD-20X on a cymbal stand or other such stand.

20

Getting Ready

Connecting the Pads

Using the provided cables, connect the pads, cymbals, hi-hat, and kick trigger. When mounting a TD-20X on an MDS-25 drum stand, use the built-in connection cables.

Set up example
Connect the various pads to the TD-20Xs TRIGGER INPUT jacks. The names of the corresponding TRIGGER INPUT jacks on the TD-20X are enclosed with a solid line in the illustration below.
fig.Kit.e

BOW/BELL RIDE

TRIGGER OUTPUT jack to TRIGGER INPUT HI-HAT jack to HH CTRL jack

CONTROL OUTPUT jack

EDGE BOW/EDGE

8/CRASH 1

10/RIDE 11/EDGE

CY-14C

9/CRASH 2 3/TOM 1 4/TOM 2

PD-105X CY-15R

7/HI-HAT HH CTRL

PD-105X

CY-14C

TD-20X

VH-12 PD-125XS

PD-125X PD-125X

5/TOM 3
KD-140

6/TOM 4

1/KICK 2/SNARE The HI-HAT and RIDE cymbal use two cables each.

21

Getting Ready

Check after making connections

Kick Sensitivity setting
Adjust Sensitivity in order to take full advantage of the TD-20Xs capabilities such as the dynamic response of the kick sounds. The Sensitivity setting is significantly influenced by differences in the particular pad youre using, your kick pedal, and your playing style. While you watch the TD-20s Trigger LED indication, adjust this setting so that the red LED lights only for the strongest hits. Operation: Press the [TRIGGER] button and press the [F2 (BASIC)] button (p. 97).

Hi-hat setting
Please make the following adjustments to ensure comfortable performance. If youre using the VH-12 V-Hi-Hat, you must adjust the hi-hat offset. This is required in order to correctly detect open/close operation and pedal movement. Access: See Making Hi-hat (VH-12) Settings (p. 25). Foot Splash Sens is also important. Try adjusting it. Access: Press the [TRIGGER] button and press the [F3 (HI-HAT)] button (p. 99). Pedal HH Volume can be adjusted for each drum kit. Access: Press the [KIT] button and press the [F2 (FUNC)] button and press the [F1 (VOLUME)] button (p. 40). The hi-hats bow and edge volume can be adjusted independently. Access: Press the [MIXER] button and press the [F1 (VOLUME)] button (p. 56). Turn the [F5 (H&R)] button off before you make adjustments.

22

Getting Ready

Connecting Headphones, Audio Equipment

fig.Connect.e

Portable Audio Player

Drum monitor, etc.

L

To AC outlet

Power Cord
Stereo 1/4 Phone plug 1/4 Phone plug (mono)

Stereo Headphones

Rear Panel

Stereo 1/4 Phone plug

Front Panel
To adjust the volume of the device connected to the MIX IN jack, turn the [MIX IN] knob on the TD-20Xs top panel. The sound input from the MIX IN jack can be output from the MASTER OUT, PHONES, or DIRECT OUT 58 jacks (p. 108). The MIX IN jack is normally used as a stereo input, but you are also free to use it as two monaural inputs (p. 113). When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the MIX IN jack may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.

1. Turn off the power of all devices before you make

connections.
To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.

2. Connect the MASTER OUT L/MONO and R jacks on

the rear panel to your drum monitor. Headphones should ONLY be connected to the PHONES jack.

3. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC inlet. 4. Plug the power cord plug into an AC outlet.
By using the MIX IN jack you can perform along with music from a CD or your portable audio player.

23

Getting Ready

5. While hitting a pad, gradually turn the [MASTER]

Turning On/Off the Power

Once the connections have been completed (p. 21p. 23), turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
fig.VolMin

(or [PHONES]) to the right to adjust the volume level.

No sound when hitting the pads or using the pedals?

Check the following points. When using audio equipment Is the audio equipment connected to the TD-20Xs MASTER OUT jacks? Is the input of the audio equipment properly connected? Is there a problem with any connection cables? Is the volume turned down in the GROUP FADERS sliders? Is the [MASTER] knob turned completely to the left? Have the input select settings of your audio equipment been made correctly? Is the audio equipment volume setting correct? When using headphones Are the headphones connected to the PHONES jack? Is the [PHONES] knob turned completely to the left?

1. Turn the [MASTER] and [PHONES] knobs

completely to the left to lower the volume to 0.

2. Turn down the volume control on the connected

audio equipment.

3. Push the [POWER] switch on the TD-20Xs rear

panel to turn on the power.
fig.PowerOn.e

Lower Position

ON

Turning off the power

1. Completely turn down the volume of the TD-20X
and the connected audio equipment.

This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally.

2. Turn off the power to the connected audio Precautions when turning on the power
After the power is turned on, do NOT hit any pads or step on the pedals until the drum kit name (following figure) appears in the display. Doing so can cause triggering problems.
fig.00-001-kit.eps_70

equipment.

3. Push the [POWER] switch on the TD-20Xs rear

panel to turn off the power.
fig.PowerOn.e

Upper Position

OFF If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the [POWER] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to Power Supply (p. 6).

4. Turn on the power to the connected audio

equipment.

24

Getting Ready

Adjusting the Volume

Use the three VOLUME CONTROL knobs to adjust the volume. Turning a knob toward the left will decrease the volume, and turning it toward the right will increase the volume.
fig.VolMin

Adjusting Mesh Head Tension (PD-125XS/125X/105X)

Before playing you must adjust the pad tension first. You can tune/adjust the head tension as you would with an acoustic drum, to get the same dynamic feel. The pad will function at its best if you are sure to: Adjust the head evenly so that it does not sag. Adjust the tuning bolts so that they are not loose.
fig.19-e.eps.80

Knob [MASTER]

Description Adjusts the volume that is output from the MASTER OUT jacks. Adjusts the volume that is output from the PHONES jack. Adjusts the volume that is input from the MIX IN jack. As the output destination of the sound thats input from the MIX IN jack, you can choose the MASTER OUT jacks, the PHONES jack, or the DIRECT OUT 58 jacks (p. 108).

[PHONES]

[MIX IN]

Making Hi-hat (VH-12) Settings

If youre using the VH-12 V-hi-hat, execute the offset adjustment from the TD-20X after making connections. This adjustment is required in order to correctly detect open, close, and pedal operations.

1. Adjust each tuning bolt little by little, across the

head as indicated in the illustration. This assures even tensioning.
Fully tightening a tuning bolt at only a single location produces uneven tensioning, and correct playing dynamics may not be achieved. Even tuning/ tensioning is very important. Head tension will not affect the actual tuning of the sound you are playing. For that you need to adjust sound parameters in the sound module you are using. Also, head tension may change depending on usage. Adjust as needed.

1. Loosen the clutch screw of the top hi-hat and let it

sit on the bottom hi-hat.
Do NOT touch the hi-hats or the pedal.

2. Hold down the [KIT] button and press the

[TRIGGER] button.
The VH Offset parameter is set automatically (approx. 3 seconds). The [TRIGGER] button stops flashing and remains lit.
fig.00-002-vhoffset.eps_70

If you need, make further adjustments to the parameters. Hi-Hat Settings [F3 (HI-HAT)] (p. 99) If you do not make VH-12s setting correctly, it may cause malfunction. For details on attaching the hi-hat to the stand, refer to the VH-12 owners manual.

25

Getting Ready

3. To stop the playback mid-way through a song,

Adjusting the Display Contrast

If the position in which the TD-20X is placed makes the display difficult to read, adjust the display contrast as follows.

press the [F4 (STOP)] or [STOP] button.

When you press the button, youll return to the beginning of the song that was playing. You can change the volume balance with GROUP FADERS (p. 30). Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [TEMPO] button to turn the metronome click (p. 81) on/off. The click sounds with the settings which you set before you enter the DEMONSTRATION screen.

1. Holding down the [KIT] button and turning the

[VALUE] dial.
You can also adjust it in the screen displayed by pressing the [SETUP] button (p. 113).

Listening to the Demo Songs

The demo songs introduce the TD-20Xs sounds and expressive capability. The drums on these songs were recorded from the TD20X to a sequencer in realtime.

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.

Caution Concerning Volume When playing back the demo song, turn the [MASTER] and [PHONES] knobs to the left (counterclockwise) to bring the volume level down. The sound levels (volume) of the instruments may be louder when the demo song is played back.

1. Press the [CHAIN] and [TOOLS] button

simultaneously.
The DEMONSTRATION screen appears.
fig.00-003-demo.eps_70

fig.00-003-demo.eps_70

2. Press the [F5 (PLAY)] or [PLAY] button.

The demo song is played. All songs will play consecutively. When the last song has finished playing, playback will return to the first song and continue. While the song plays, you can use the function buttons to mute a specific part.
Function button [F1 (DRUMS)] [F2 (BACKING)] You can MUTE the entire drum track. You can MUTE all the backing instruments.

26

Getting Ready

Changing the drum kit used

Normally, the demo songs will be played using the drum kit recommended for each song. However, you are free to listen to the demo songs played using a different drum kit.

Demo Songs
No. 1 2 Title Copyright Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2009, Roland Corporation Copyright 2004, Roland US Copyright 2005, Roland US

Kit 1:TD-20X Kit 4:MetalCore Kit 6:40s Bop Kit 7:process Kit 2:50s King Kit15:TechFusion Kit 8:Cajon Kit10:melodious Kit21:D-N-B Kit 3:CtrlRoom
Song:Cluster Hang Song:Hatter

1. In the DEMONSTRATION screen, select the kit

that you want to use. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and [VALUE] dial to select a drum kit.
Parameter Value TD-20 PRESET TDW-20 PRESET USER CARD Description The TD-20s preset drum kit

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The TDW-20s preset drum kit A drum kit in user memory A backup drum kit saved on a CompactFlash card If you selected CARD for Memory, select a backup.

Memory

10 11 12

BackUp Kit

199

Select the kit that you want to use.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws. No data for the music that is played will be output from the MIDI OUT connector.

You can change the drum kit while the demo song is either playing or stopped. If you switch songs, the song will play with the recommended drum kit specified for that song.

27

Overview
Basic Operation
Changing a Value
Saving your settings
Every time you change a value during the editing process, its automatically stored in the TD-20Xs memory. Theres no write/save process. The [-] and [+] buttons and the [VALUE] dial are both used to change the values of settings. Both methods have advantages.

Changing data values ([-] [+] buttons/[VALUE] dial)

fig.00-004_40

Moving the cursor ([CURSOR] buttons)

fig.00-001e_70

[-] [+] buttons

Each time the [+] button is pressed, the value increases. Each time the [-] button is pressed, the value decreases. This is convenient for fine adjustments. When making an on/off setting, the [+] button will turn the setting on and the [-] button will turn it off.

Cursor
Cursor refers to the highlighted characters indicating an onscreen parameter that can be set. When there is more than one possibility within the screen, use the [CURSOR] buttons to move it.
fig.00-002_50

If you hold down the [+] button and press the [-] button, the value will increase rapidly. If you hold down the [-] button and press the [+] button, the value will decrease rapidly. If you hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [-] or [+] button, the value will change even more rapidly.

[VALUE] dial
The dial allows you to make quick changes to the value. If you hold down the [SHIFT] button and turn the [VALUE] dial, the value will change even more rapidly.

Selecting a function to edit (Function buttons)

fig.00-003_50

The [F1][F5] buttons are called function buttons. The bottom part of the display will show the names of the functions available for the [F1][F5] buttons. For example, if this owners manual makes reference to the [F2 (EDIT)] button, press [F2] button (in this case, EDIT is displayed above the [F2] button).

28

Overview

Choosing a Pad to Edit

About the upper right display screen indications
fig.00-005-snare.eps_70

Choosing pads from the TD-20Xs top panel

fig.00-007_70

You can use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select a pad/sound without needing to hit a pad and/or when a pad is not connected. In screens that allow you to edit specific settings for each pad, the upper right of the display will show the trigger number and name of the TRIGGER INPUT jack to which the selected pad is connected. The initial H or R indicates whether the settings are for the pads head (HEAD) or rim (RIM). Pressing the [PREVIEW] button will play either the head or rim sound depending on whether H or R is displayed. The position indicated in the illustration below tells you whether the edit screen is for the head or the rim.
fig.00-006-snare.eps_70

Pressing the [1] button will select the next lower-numbered trigger. Pressing the [15] button will select the next highernumbered trigger. When using a dual trigger pad (with rim trigger) the [RIM] button selects whether youre making settings for the head or the rim of the selected pad. When rim is selected, the [RIM] button will light.

Auditioning the sound of a pad ([PREVIEW] button)

Press the [PREVIEW] button to hear the sound of the selected pad/sound using the TRIG SELECT buttons.

Choosing by hitting a pad

To edit the settings for a pad, strike that pad to select it. To select the rim of a pad, strike the rim. By pressing the [LOCK] button to make it light, you can prevent the edited pad from being switched even if you accidentally touch a different pad (p. 46).

29

Overview

Using The Group Faders (GROUP FADERS/[FADER])

fig.00-009

Example: Adjusting the Snare Volume 1. Press the [FADER] button so the upper indicator is
lit.

2. Move the GROUP FADERS [SNARE] slider.

The slider position shows the current snare volume. After switching with the [FADER] button, the values for the GROUP FADERS sliders may not reflect the actual volume of the sound assigned to that fader. So after switching, be sure to move the faders a bit before making your setting. This will NOT affect the independent volume balance for each kit in: Mixer Settings (p. 56). Use the GROUP FADERS sliders to adjust the volume. By pressing the [FADER] button, the function of the faders changes as shown in the chart below. An LED will light up at the upper and lower right of the faders, indicating which set of sounds is active.

Turning the Click On/Off

Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [TEMPO] button to turn the click on and off. The [TEMPO] button indicator can also be used as a visual metronome (p. 81).

When upper indicator is lit

You can adjust the volume of following trigger inputs.
KICK SNARE TOMS HI-HAT CRASH 1 CRASH 2 RIDE AUX 1 KICK 2 SNARE 3 TOM 1, 4 TOM 2, 5 TOM 3, 6 TOM 4 7 HI-HAT 8 CRASH 1 9 CRASH 2 10 RIDE, 11 EDGE 12 AUX 1, 13 AUX 2, 14 AUX 3, 15 AUX 4

Changing the Tempo ([TEMPO])

fig.00-007-tempo.eps_70

To adjust the tempo of the sequencer and click, use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial in the screen displayed by pressing the [TEMPO] button.

When lower indicator is lit

You can adjust the volume of following trigger inputs and sequencer parts.
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 PERC BACKING CLICK 12 AUX 1 13 AUX 2 14 AUX 3 15 AUX 4 Percussion part (p. 73) Backing part (p. 72) Metronome click (p. 81)

30

Overview

About Memory
Memory is the area in which settings such as kits and patterns are stored.

Preset memory
This is non-rewritable memory inside the TD-20X. You can copy preset memory data to user memory, and then edit it as desired. The factory settings are stored in preset data. The preset memorys drum kits are organized into two groups: TD-20 and TDW-20.

User memory
The memory area in the TD-20X is rewritable. All settings are stored as soon as you edit them. When you load or copy data from a CompactFlash card or from preset memory, and edit the settings, they will be stored in the user memory.

Settings stored in preset memory

Drum kits (p. 39) Percussion sets (p. 73) Trigger settings (p. 96) Preset patterns (p. 69)

Settings saved in user memory

Setup (p. 108) Drum kits (p. 39) Percussion sets (p. 73) Trigger settings (p. 96) Drum kit chains (p. 43) User patterns (p. 69) Drum kits include settings for the instruments. For details, refer to Drum kit (p. 35). Drum kits include settings for the instruments. For details, refer to Drum kit (p. 35).

CompactFlash
The settings in user memory can be stored (backed up) on a CompactFlash card as a set, and a single card can hold up to 99 such sets. Separately from these backups, you can also store up to 100 patterns on a card. Data saved on a CompactFlash card can be loaded or copied into user memory, and modified as desired. For details, refer to Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD] (p. 91).

31

Overview

Playing Methods
The available performance techniques will depend on the trigger input. Positional sensing will also depend on the trigger input. For details on the performance techniques and striking points supported by each trigger input, refer to Trigger Inputs and Playing Methods Corresponding Chart (p. 97).

Change the nuance of the rim shot

With certain snare and tom sounds, slight changes in the way you play rim shots changes the nuance.
fig.Play-Rim.e

Normal rim shot (Open rim shot)

Strike the head and rim simultaneously. Head Rim
fig.Play-Shallow.e

About the instruments corresponding to each playing method, refer to Drum Instrument List (p. 131).

Shallow rim shot

Simultaneously strike the head near the rim and the rim itself. Head Rim

Pad (PD-125XS/125X/105X)
fig.Play-Head.e

Head shot
Hit only the head of the pad. With certain snare sounds, playing position will change the nuance of the sound.
fig.Play-Rim.e

Playing with brushes

With the TD-20X, you can swish or sweep using brushes with the PD-125XS, 4PD-125X, or PD-105X connected to TRIGGER INPUT 2 (SNARE). When playing with brushes, turn the Brush Switch to ON (p. 40). Use ONLY nylon brushes. Head Rim

Head

Rim shot
Strike the head and the rim of the pad simultaneously.

fig.Play-Cross.e

Cross stick
Only strike the rim of the pad. Depending on the instrument assigned to the rim you can play rim shots and/or cross stick sounds.

Rim

Do not place your hand on the head

To play the cross stick, be sure that you only strike the rim of the pad. Placing your hand on the head of the pad might prevent the cross stick sound from being played properly.

32

Overview

Hi-Hat (VH-12)
Open/closed
The hi-hat tone changes smoothly and continuously from open to closed in response to how far the pedal is pressed. You can also play the foot closed sound (playing the hi-hat with the pedal completely pressed down) and foot splash sound (playing the hi-hat with the pedal fully pressed and then instantly opening it).

Cymbal (CY-15R/14C)
Bow shot
This is the most common playing method, playing the middle area of the cymbal. It corresponds to the sound of the headside of the connected trigger input.
fig.Play-CYBow

Pressure
When you strike the hi-hat while pressing on the pedal with the hi-hat closed, you can then change the closed tone in response to the pressure you place on the pedal.

Bow shot
This playing method involves striking the middle area of the top hi-hat. It corresponds to the sound of the head-side of the connected trigger input.
fig.Play-VHBow

Edge shot
This playing method involves striking the edge with the shoulder of the stick. When played as shown in the figure, the rim-side sound of the connected input is triggered.
fig.Play-CYEdge.e

Edge sensor

Edge shot
This playing method involves striking the edge of the top hihat with the shoulder of the stick. When played as shown in the figure, the rim-side sound of the connected trigger input is triggered.
fig.Play-VHEdge.e

Bell shot (CY-15R)

This playing method involves striking the bell. On the CY-15R, when played as shown in the figure, the rim-side sound of the connected input is triggered. Strike the bell somewhat strongly with the shoulder of the stick.
fig.Play-Bell

Edge sensor

Do not strike the bottom hi-hat or the underside of the top hi-hat.

On the CY-14C, bell shots are not supported.

33

Overview

Choke play
Choking (pinching) the cymbals edge with the hand immediately after hitting the cymbal makes the sound stop. Choke the location of the edge sensor shown in the figure. If you choke an area where there is no sensor, the sound does not stop.
fig.Play-Choke.e

Basic Structure
Broadly speaking, the TD-20X consists of a controller section, sound generator section, and sequencer section.
TD-10_e.eps_45

Roland logo

Edge sensor

Controller section
(Pads and pedals) Trigger signals Trigger signals

Trigger input jacks Record Play Playback Patterns

Positional Sensing
PD-120_e.eps_65

Sequencer section

Sound generator section

Tone changes depending on strike point

TD-20X

Controller section
This consists of the pads and pedals on which you perform. For a snare drum, the tone will change naturally as you move the strike location from the center of the head toward the rim.
fig.Play-CYPosi

When you strike a pad, it outputs a trigger signal. The trigger signal is input to a TRIGGER INPUT jack on the rear panel of the TD-20X, and is received by the sound generator section.

Sound generator section

This section produces the sound. It receives trigger signals from the controller, and plays the instruments (instrumental sounds) accordingly. With certain ride sounds, playing position will change the nuance of the sound. Signals from the sequencer can be used to play patterns, and MIDI messages from an external MIDI device can be received to play sounds.

Sequencer section
This section records the performance of the controllers, and sends the recorded performance data (patterns) to the sound generator section. MIDI messages recorded on the sequencer can also be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector to control an external MIDI device.

34

Overview

Main Functions (Terminology)

Drum kit
A drum kit contains instrument (instrumental sound) settings for each pad, effect settings, and settings for the entire kit. When the TD-20X is shipped, it contains drum kits 1100. Each drum kit has distinctive instruments and effects for each pad, and by switching drum kits you can enjoy playing a wide variety of drum sounds.
fig.drumkit_j.eps

Preset drum kits With the factory settings, user memory contains drum kit numbers 1100. These factory-set drum kits are called the preset drum kits. When you edit the settings of a drum kit, the contents of the preset drum kit will be overwritten. If you want to restore the preset drum kit settings to their original condition, you can copy the corresponding TD-20 or TDW-20 drum kit from preset memory (p. 42), or execute the Factory Reset (p. 114) operation to return the TD-20X to its factory-set condition.

Drum Kit 100

Each drum kit contains the following settings.

Drum Kit 1
Pad settings
KICK SNARE TOM 1 TOM 2 TOM 3

Instruments
Head 2 Rim 2
HI-HAT

Head 1 Rim 1
TOM 4

Head 3 Rim 3
CRASH 1

Head 4 Rim 4
CRASH 2

Head 5 Rim 5
RIDE

Each instrumental sound such as a snare drum or kick drum is called an instrument. An instrument is assigned to each part of a pad that can be struck separately, such as the head and the rim. You can create the desired sound by editing the settings of each instrument. By using V-EDIT you can also reproduce the tonal change caused by changes in the material and depth of the drum body of the selected instrument. For more about V-EDIT refer to What is V-EDIT? (p. 48).

Head 6 Rim 6
EDGE

Head 7 Rim 7
AUX 1

Head 8 Rim 8
AUX 2

Head 9 Rim 9
AUX 3

Head 10 Rim 10
AUX 4

Head 11 Rim 11

Head 12 Rim 12

Head 13 Rim 13

Head 14 Rim 14

Head 15 Rim 15

Instrument settings
Instrument, V-EDIT/EDIT

Mixer
Within each drum kit, you can adjust the volume balance and pan (stereo position) of each pad. The mixer is where you make volume and pan settings for each pad.

Mixer settings
Volume, Pan, Minimum Volume

Effects settings
Compressor, Equalizer settings Ambience/Multi-Effects Send Level

Various function settings

Pad Pattern settings Pitch Control function settings, MIDI settings

Ambience settings
ON/OFF, Room Type, Wall Type, etc.

Multi-Effects settings
ON/OFF, Type, effect level, etc.

Settings affecting the entire Drum Kit

Volume, Drum Kit Name, MIDI settings, etc.

35

Overview

Effects
The sound can be processed in a wide variety of ways by applying effects. The TD-20X provides the following effects; some effects can be applied to individual pads, while other effects apply to the entire drum kit. Compressor/equalizer (COMP/EQ) A compressor is an effect that reduces the volume peaks, thus modifying the attack and the sense of loudness. An equalizer divides the sound into separate frequency ranges such as high, mid, and low, allowing you to adjust the balance of these ranges. The TD-20X provides a pad compressor/equalizer that can be applied to each pad individually, and a master compressor/ equalizer that applies to the entire drum kit. Ambience Ambience is an effect that simulates the acoustics of the location in which youre performing. You can vary the effect thats applied by adjusting the size of the room, the material of the walls, and the position of the microphone. You can make ambience settings for each drum kit, and specify the amount of effect thats applied to each instrument. Multi-effects This allows you to apply effects such as reverb or delay. Numerous types of multi-effect are provided, each with its own distinctive character. You can make multi-effect settings for each drum kit, and specify the amount of effect thats applied to each instrument.

Trigger settings
Trigger settings ensure that the trigger signals from the pads and pedals are appropriately conveyed to the sound generator section so that youll get the performance you expect. In addition to specifying the type of pad thats connected to each trigger input jack, you can also make detailed settings to adjust each pads sensitivity. Make trigger settings if you want to use an acoustic drum trigger.

Sequencer (pattern/part)
The term sequencer generally refers to a digital music device or computer software that lets you record and play back a performance. The TD-20Xs sequencer lets you play and record patterns.

Patterns/part
A pattern contains performance data for six parts: drum, melody, bass, backing 1, backing 2, and percussion. You can use patterns to create the backing of a song youll use for drum practice, or assign short phrases to patterns and recall them when desired. There are preset patterns already provided, and you can play back these preset patterns while you practice the drums. Patterns that you record are saved as user patterns. To record a pattern, youll use realtime recording the method in which your playing on the pads or on an external MIDI keyboard is recorded just as you play it.

36

Overview

Convenient Functions
Auditioning the sound of a drum kit
You can audition the currently selected drum kit by using a phrase to play its sounds. For convenient auditioning, the TD-20X provides various drum and backing phrases (preset patterns). Select a drum kit, and then play one of the following patterns to hear its sounds, such as its kick and snare or snare and toms.
Pattern no. 1 2 3 Name Preview Preview Jazz Drum Basic Purpose Audition the sounds of the entire kit Audition the kick, snare, hihat, and ride cymbal sounds Audition the tom, and crash cymbal sounds

Returning edited drum kits to their factory settings

Returning all settings to their factory-set state
If desired, you can return the drum kits and all other settings to their factory-set state (Factory Reset). For details on the procedure, refer to Restoring the Factory Settings [F5 (F RESET)] (p. 114).

Returning an individual kit to its factory setting

An individual drum kit whose instrument or effect settings youve edited can be returned to the factory-set state by using the Copy function. Select PRESET as the copy-source, and then select the drum kit whose settings you want to return to the factory-set state. For details on the procedure, refer to Copying a Drum Kit (p. 42).

Drum Fill

Playing a pattern by striking a pad (Pad Pattern function)

You can start playback of a specified pattern by striking a pad. For details on the procedure, refer to Playing a Pattern by Hitting a Pad (Pad Pattern) [F1 (PATTERN)] (p. 52).

For details on the procedure, refer to Choosing a Pattern [PATTERN] (p. 70) and Playing Back a Pattern [PLAY] (p. 71).

You can also use the GROUP FADERS to adjust the volume balance or to mute unwanted instruments (p. 30).

Recalling drum kits in a specified order (Drum Kit Chain)

By specifying the desired drum kit for each step of a 32-step chain, you can specify the order in which you want drum kits to be recalled. This function is called Drum Kit Chain. This is convenient for a live performance, since it provides an easy way for you to specify and then recall drum kits in the order you need to use them. For more about this function, refer to Specifying the Order in Which Drum Kits will be Recalled [CHAIN] (p. 43).

Switching drum kits by striking a pad (Pad Switch function)

Pads connected to TRIGGER INPUT jacks 14 AUX 3 and 15 AUX 4 can be used to switch drum kits or patterns. For details on the procedure, refer to Using Pads as Switches [F2 (PAD SW)] (p. 111).

Using cross-stick techniques

For each drum kit, you can specify whether cross-stick techniques can or cannot be used. For details on the procedure, refer to Playing Cross Stick [F5 (XSTICK)] (p. 41).

As the rim sound for the snare, select an instrument marked by *X in Drum Instrument List (p. 131).

37

Overview

Playing along with a pattern

The TD-20X provides a variety of patternsdrum sound and backing phrases. Its easy to play along with these patterns. You can also create your own patterns (User Patterns). For details on the procedure, refer to Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer (p. 69).

Backing up data to a CompactFlash card

By using a separately sold CompactFlash card, you can save (back up) 99 sets of the contents of user memory. A specified drum kit or instrument can also be copied from the backup data into user memory. For details on the procedure, refer to Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD] (p. 91).

Using the Copy function

Settings such as the instrument set (with or without COMP/ EQ), ambience, multi-effect, volume, pan, and trigger settings can be copied from preset memory or from a backup on a CompactFlash card.
Settings to copy Drum Kit Drum Kit Chain INST Instrument PAD COMP/EQ VOLUME Mixer PAN AMBIENCE Effect MFX Trigger Bank p. 106 p. 68 p. 57 p. 54 See page p. 42 p. 44

Using a CompactFlash card drum kit without loading it (Kit Selection)

Preset drum kits of the TD-20 or TDW-20 or backed-up drum kits saved on a CompactFlash card can be played without loading them. This is called the Kit Selection function. This is a convenient way to perform without rewriting the contents of user memory. If desired, you can also copy this data to a drum kit in user memory. For details on the procedure, refer to Playing a Kit from the CompactFlash without Loading It (Kit Selection) [F1 (KIT SEL)] (p. 121).

Specifying a sounds output destination (Output Assign)

You can specify the output jack from which the sound of each pad will be output. This is called the Output Assign function. You can also specify that only the ambience component will be output from the MASTER OUT jacks. For details on the procedure, refer to Output Assignments [F2 (OUTPUT)] (p. 108).

Settings for an added pad (Trigger Parameters)

Youll need to make trigger settings if you connect an additional pad to the TD-20X. Specify the model (trigger type) of the pad youve connected. For details on the procedure, refer to Selecting the Pad Type [F1 (BANK)] (p. 96).

38

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

A drum kit consists of a sound selection for each pad, together with effect settings, etc. (p. 35).

Choosing a Drum Kit

1. Press the [KIT] button.
The [KIT] button lights, and the DRUM KIT screen appears.
fig.01-001-kit.eps_70

Selecting a Drum Kit from the List [F1 (LIST)]

You can select a drum kit by accessing the list of available kits.

1. Press the [KIT] button.

The DRUM KIT screen appears.

2. Press the [F1 (LIST)] button.

The DRUM KIT LIST screen appears.

2. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

drum kits.
Footswitches or pads can be programmed to make selections (p. 110). The selected or current kit number is indicated at all times in the number display at the left of the display.

fig.01-003-kitlist.eps_70

Function button [F1 (< PAGE)] [F2 (PAGE >)] The previous page of the list appears. The next page of the list appears. Switches between drum kit numbers 1 50 (with the factory settings, these contain the TDW-20s preset drum kits) and drum kit numbers 51100 (with the factory settings, these contain the TD-20 preset drum kits).

About the DRUM KIT Screen

fig.01-002-kit.eps_70

[F4 (TDW<>TD20)]

3. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR]

B
A B Drum kit name Overall kit effects on/off status (p. 58)

buttons to select a drum kit.

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.

Function button [F1 (LIST)] [F2 (FUNC)] [F3 (NAME)] [F5 (XSTICK)] Displays the drum kit list. Edits settings for each drum kit (p. 40). Assigns a name to the drum kit (p. 41). Selects whether cross-stick techniques can be used (p. 41).

Regardless of which screen is displayed, you can press the [KIT] button to access the DRUM KIT screen. However, this will not work from the PATTERN REC STANDBY screen or the PATTERN RECORDING screen (p. 84), or during a bulk dump (p. 119).

39

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

Making Settings for Each Drum Kit [F2 (FUNC)]

1. Press the [KIT] button.
The DRUM KIT screen appears.

When you select a kit of which Kit Tempo is set to ON, the defined tempo appears in the upper right of the DRUM KIT screen.
fig.01-006-kittempo-on.eps_70

2. Press the [F2 (FUNC)] button. 3. Use the [F1][F5] buttons to select the setting that
you want to make.

Playing Brushes [F3 (BRUSH)]

In each kit, you can choose whether sticks or brushes will be used.
fig.01-007-brush.eps_70

4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] button to select a

parameter.

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or [VALUE] dial to specify the

value.

6. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the Volume [F1 (VOLUME)]

fig.01-004-kitvol.eps_70

Parameter Brush Switch

Value OFF ON

Description For using sticks For using brushes

When Brush Switch is set to ON, the brush icon appears in the DRUM KIT screen.
Parameter Kit Volume Pedal HH Volume XStick Volume Value 0127 0127 0127 Description Volume of the entire drum kit Volume of the hi-hats foot closed sound Volume of cross stick sound
fig.01-008-brush-on.eps_70

Assigning a Tempo for Each Kit [F2 (TEMPO)]

When you select a drum kit of which Kit Tempo is set to ON, the tempo you define here will be set automatically.
fig.01-005-kittempo.eps_70

Turning the Pad Pattern Function On/ Off [F4 (PAD PTN)]
This function allows you to turning the Pad Pattern function on/off. For more about the Pad Pattern function, refer to Playing a Pattern by Hitting a Pad (Pad Pattern) [F1 (PATTERN)] (p. 52).
fig.01-009-padptn.eps_70

Parameter Kit Tempo

Value OFF ON

Description Tempo is not defined Tempo is defined Defined tempo

Tempo

20260

40

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

Viewing the Output Level (OUPUT MONITOR) [F5 (MONITOR)]

You can view the volume that is being output from the MASTER OUT, PHONES, or DIRECT OUT jacks. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to choose the jacks.
fig.01-010-mon.eps_70

Playing Cross Stick [F5 (XSTICK)]

For each kit, you can specify whether cross-stick techniques can be used.

1. Press the [KIT] button.

The DRUM KIT screen appears.

2. Press the [F5 (XSTICK)] button.

Each time you press the button, cross-stick will alternate between enabled and disabled. Cross stick can be played

Naming a Drum Kit [F3 (NAME)]

You can rename the currently selected kit; the maximum is 12 characters.

fig.01-012-xstick-on.eps_70

1. Press the [KIT] button.

The DRUM KIT screen appears. Cross stick not possible
fig.01-013-xstick-off.eps_70

2. Press the [F3 (NAME)] button.

The DRUM KIT NAME screen appears.
fig.01-011-name.eps_70

Function button A blank space is inserted at the cursor position, and characters after this point are moved to the right one space. Character at the cursor position is deleted, and characters after this point are moved to the left one space. Character at the cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Type of character at the cursor position changes between uppercase/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols.

[F1 (INSERT)]

When using the cross-stick technique, you can specify the velocity at which the cross-stick sound will be switched with the open rim shot sound. If this XStick Thrshld setting is set to 127, only the cross-stick sound will play every time. For more about making this setting, refer to Detailed Settings for Rim Shots [F2 (RIM)] (p. 104).

[F2 (DELETE)]

[F3 (SPACE)]

[F4 (CHAR)]

3. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.

4. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous

screen.

41

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

4. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

Copying a Drum Kit

You can copy a drum kit from preset memory or from a CompactFlash card. For user memory, you can rearrange the data by exchanging the copy-source and copy-destination drum kits.

[VALUE] dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.

If you selected [F2 (PRESET)] in step 3, specify whether youre copying from TD-20 or from TDW-20. If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 3, select the copy-source backup number.

Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

5. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 3, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying a user memory drum kit)
fig.01-016-copy-conf.eps_70

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.
fig.01-014-copy-a.eps_70

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

2. Press the [F1 (KIT)] button to select the drum kit.

fig.01-015-copy1-user.eps_70

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

Copy source

Copying Fifty Drum Kits at a Time

You can copy fifty drum kits in a single operation.
Copy destination

Proceed as described in Copying a drum kit, but change steps 2 as follows. In step 2, choose [F4 (50 KITS)].

The screen above can be accessed from the DRUM KIT screen (p. 39) by pressing the [COPY] button while you hold down the [SHIFT] button.

3. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. You can choose from TDW-20s preset data or TD-20 preset data. Select this if you want to return to the factory-set kit settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

[F1 (USER)]

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

42

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

2. Press the [F1 (C_EDIT)] button.

Specifying the Order in Which Drum Kits will be Recalled [CHAIN]

Drum Kit Chain allows you to step through the drum kits of your choice and in the order you want. The TD-20X lets you create and store 16 different chains of up to 32 steps each. You can specify the order in which youll be using drum kits in your live performance; this makes it easy for you to step through them as desired.
fig.11-001e

The CHAIN EDIT screen appears.

fig.01-019-cain-edit.eps_70

Chain number

Steps

Function button A step with the same kit is inserted at the cursor position, and steps after this point are moved back one place. Step at the cursor position is deleted, and steps after this point are moved forward one place. You can name a drum kit chain (p. 44).

[F1 (INSERT)]

32 steps
[F2 (DELETE)]

Chain 1

Kit 7

Kit 2

Kit 5

Kit 10

[F5 (NAME)]

Chain 2

3. Press the [CURSOR (left)] button to move the cursor

to the chain number.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

Chain 16

the chain number.

5. Press the [CURSOR (right)] button to move the

Creating a Drum Kit Chain

1. Press the [CHAIN] button to switch drum kit chain
on.
The [CHAIN] button lights, and the DRUM KIT CHAIN screen appears.
fig.01-018-chain-on.eps_70

cursor to the step (the order in which the drum kits will be selected) in the right area of the display.

6. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

step.

7. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the drum kit.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to create the drum kit chain.

fig.01-020-chain-edit.eps_70

Function button [F1 (C EDIT)] [F2 (FUNC)] [F3 (NAME)] [F5 (XSTICK)] Create, modify, or rename a drum kit chain. Edit the settings of each drum kit (p. 40). Rename a drum kit (p. 41). Specify whether cross-stick technique will be enabled (p. 41).

9. Press the [EXIT] button.

The DRUM KIT CHAIN screen appears.

43

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

Naming a Drum Kit Chain [F5 (NAME)]

Each chains name can use up to 12 characters.

Copying a Drum Kit Chain

You can copy a drum kit chain from preset memory or from a CompactFlash card. For user memory, you can rearrange the data by exchanging the copy-source and copy-destination drum kit chains. Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

1. Select the drum kit chain you want to name in the

DRUM KIT CHAIN screen.

2. Press the [F1 (C EDIT)] button. 3. Press the [F5 (NAME)] button.
The CHAIN NAME screen appears.
fig.01-021-chain-name.eps_70

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.

2. Press the [F5 (A<>B<>C)] button twice to access the

Function button A blank space is inserted at the cursor position, and characters after this point are moved to the right one space. Character at the cursor position is deleted, and characters after this point are moved to the left one space. Character at the cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Type of character at the cursor position changes between upper case/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols.

COPY C screen.
fig.01-022-copy-c.eps_70

[F1 (INSERT)]

[F2 (DELETE)]

[F3 (SPACE)]

3. Press the [F2 (CHAIN)] button.

fig.01-023-chain-copy.eps_70

Copy source

[F4 (CHAR)]

4. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.
Copy destination

5. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

4. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. [F2 (PRESET)] All drum kit chains in preset memory are empty. [F3 (CARD)] Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

6. When youre finished, press the [EXIT] button twice

to return to the DRUM KIT CHAIN screen.

[F1 (USER)]

44

Chapter 1. Drum Kit Settings [KIT]

5. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

[VALUE] dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.
If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 4, select the copy-source backup number.

Using a Drum Kit Chain

Heres how to select a drum kit chain youve created, and step through the drum kits in the order you want to use them.

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 4, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying a drum kit chain from a CompactFlash card)
fig.01-024-chain-copy-conf.eps_70

Selecting a drum kit chain 1. Press the [CHAIN] button to make it light.
The drum kit chain function will turn on.
fig.01-025-chain-on.eps_70

2. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

chain number that you want to use.
If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

Switching drum kits 3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to recall
the drum kits in the step order you specified.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

4. When youve finished performing, press the

[CHAIN] button to make it go dark, or press the [EXIT] button.
The drum kit chain function will turn off. You can assign a footswitch or pad to recall a drum kit chain or a drum kit. For details, refer to Assigning a Function to a Footswitch or Pad [F3 (CONTROL)] (p. 110). If differences in volume levels between kits is a problem, press the [MIXER] button and adjust Kit Volume (the overall kit volume (p. 56)).

45

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

Heres how to select and edit sounds, such as the snare drum and kick drum.

Choosing a Pad to Edit

There are two basic ways to select the sound you want to edit.

Lock the Pad You are Editing (EDIT LOCK)

When editing instruments, you can prevent the screen from being switched inadvertently even if you hit another pad.

1. Select the pad to be locked.

Choose by hitting a pad

1. Press the [INST] button.
The [INST] button lights, and the INST screen appears.
fig.02-001-inst.eps_70

The settings screen for the pad appears.

2. Press the TRIG SELECT [LOCK] button to make it

light.
The pad is locked and other pads cannot be selected.

3. To release the lock, press the [LOCK] button to

make it go off.
You can change the pad to be locked by pressing the TRIG SELECT [1] or [15] button even if the [LOCK] button is lit.

2. Strike a pad.
The settings screen for the struck pad appears. To select a pads rim, strike the rim.

Assign an Instrument to a Pad

Choose with the trigger select buttons
All the TD-20X sounds are referred to as instruments (INST).

1. Press the [INST] button.

The [INST] button lights, and the INST screen appears.

You can choose an instrument from the TD-20 instruments or the TDW-20 instruments. In this case, choose TD-20 instruments from INT and TDW-20 instruments from EXP.

2. Press the TRIG SELECT [1] or [15] button to select

the pad (the trigger input number).
The trigger input number is indicated in the upper part of the screen.

1. Press the [INST] button.

The [INST] button lights, and the INST screen appears.
fig.02-003-inst.eps_70

3. Press the TRIG SELECT [RIM] button to select the

head or rim.
Head: Rim:
fig.02-002-inst.eps_70

The [RIM] button is unlit. The [RIM] button is lit.

Group Inst Type of instrument Name of instrument

For the EXP instrument group, an EXP icon is shown before the name. The V-EDIT icon is shown in edit screens that allow V-EDIT (p. 48). When MIDI note number corresponding to a pad is received, the pad is selected and shown in the screen (p. 53).

46

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

3. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Function button [F1 (LIST)] [F2 (EDIT)] Displays the instrument list. Edits instrument settings (p. 48). Lets you use the pads and pedal as controllers (p. 52). You can use the pads to play patterns, or make MIDI settings for the pads and pedal. Switches between TD-20 (INT) and TDW-20 (EXP) instruments. Switches between selecting the head and rim instruments as a set, or selecting them independently.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. The INST LIST screen for the selected pad will appear.

[F3 (CONTROL)]

4. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR]

buttons to select the instrument.

[F4 (INT<>EXP)]

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the INST

screen.

[F5 (H&R)]

The indication below the instrument name

If you turn the [F5 (H&R)] button off, the following information will be shown below the instrument name. Youll be able to obtain the effects that are shown.
fig.02-005-inst-info.eps_70

2. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. The edit screen for the selected pad will appear.

3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to move the

cursor to Group or Inst.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the Inst group/instrument.
POSI

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.
INTRVL

The tone will change according to the striking position. For a rim sound, the tone will change depending on the depth at which the stick strikes the rim. Use the Position Ctrl setting to turn this effect on/off. You can specify this only for specific trigger inputs (p. 53). Smoothes the interval between notes according to the performance technique used, such as a roll or flam. If the cross-stick switch is on (p. 41), youll be able to play rim shots and cross-stick separately.

Selecting an Instrument from the List [F1 (LIST)]

Here you can select from the list of all available instruments.

XSTK

1. Press the [INST] button. 2. Press the [F1 (LIST)] button.

The INST LIST screen appears.
fig.02-004-inst-list.eps_70

This information can also be seen in Drum Instrument List (p. 131).

Function button [F1 (< GROUP)], [F2 (GROUP >)] [F4 (INT<>EXP)] Selects the Inst Group. Switches between TD-20 (INT) and TDW-20 (EXP) instruments. Switches to select the head and rim instruments simultaneously or individually.

[F5 (H & R)]

47

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

Editing Drum Sounds [F2 (EDIT)]

Editing methods differ according to the type of instrument.

Editing Procedure
1. Press the [INST] button. 2. Press the [F2 (EDIT)] button.
The INST EDIT screen appears.

Editing Acoustic Drum Sounds (V-EDIT)

What is V-EDIT?
This is a function that allows you to simulate the tonal changes produced by differences in the material, shape, and size of an instrument. By choosing and tuning a favorite head, or attaching muffling (a mute), you can create your sound in an intuitive way just as when adjusting an acoustic drum.

3. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. The edit screen for the selected pad will appear.

4. Use the [F1][F4] and [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons

to select the parameter.

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

When V-EDIT can be used

V-EDIT is possible in the following instrument groups KICK, SNARE, TOM, HI-HAT, CRASH, SPLASH, CHINA, STACKED CYMBAL, or RIDE. The following icon appears to indicate instruments which are V-EDIT compatible.
fig.02-006-inst.eps_70

the setting.

6. When finished, press the [EXIT] button to return to

the INST screen.
You can return the settings of the currently selected instrument to their standard values. In the INST EDIT screen or INST screen, hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [F4] button; a confirmation message will appear. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to return the instrument settings to the standard values for that instrument. You can edit the head and rim instruments as a pair. Each time you press the [F5 (H&R)] button, you will alternate between editing the head and rim simultaneously or separately. However if instruments from different instrument groups are selected for the head and the rim, they will be edited separately even if youve turned on the [F5 (H&R)] button. This setting is shown by the HEAD and RIM icons in the upper left of the screen. For some instruments, raising or lowering the value beyond a certain point may not produce further change. KICK/SNARE/TOM: Head Tuning CRASH/SPLASH/CHINA/RIDE: Sustain Other Instruments: Pitch and Decay Time

Editing Other Instruments

Other instruments only allow Pitch, Decay Time, and Dynamic Pitch Bend adjustment (p. 51).

48

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

The edit screens for each pad

KICK
fig.02-007-kick-f1.eps_70

SNARE
fig.02-011-snare-f1.eps_70

Parameter

Value

Description

[F1 (SHELL)] button Parameter Value Description Material Shell Depth Depth of the shell WOOD, STEEL, BRASS 1.020.0 Material of the shell Depth of the shell

[F1 (SHELL)] button Shell Depth NORMAL, DEEP12 FELT, WOOD, PLASTIC

[F2 (HEAD)] button CLEAR, COATED, PINSTRIPE -480+480

Beater Type

Type of beater

Head Type

Type of head

[F2 (HEAD)] button CLEAR, COATED, PINSTRIPE -480+480

Head Tuning Type of head

Tuning of the head

Head Type

[F3 (MUFFLE)] button OFF, TAPE12, DOUGHNUTS1 2 OFF, LOOSE, MEDIUM, TIGHT

Head Tuning

Tuning of the head

Muffling

Muffling (muting) setting

[F3 (MUFFLE)] button OFF, TAPE12, BLANKET, WEIGHT OFF, 18 Strainer Adj. Muffling (muting) setting

Muffling

Tension of the strainer (resonating cords)

[F4 (MIC/ADD)] button Resonance to the snare Mic Position Tonal change caused by microphone position Emphasizes the lowfrequency portion of the attack Amount of resonance for the entire drum kit Level OUTSIDE41, STANDARD, INSIDE14 OFF, TAMB, 909 CLAPS, GATE HIT Tonal change caused by microphone position Sound added to the rim shot sound If this is OFF, only the rim shot sound will be heard. Adjusts the volume balance of the sound added by Add Rim Sound.

Snare Buzz

[F4 (MIC/RES)] button OUTSIDE41, STANDARD, INSIDE14 NORMAL, LARGE

Mic Position

Add Rim Sound

Mic Size

-3+3

Kit Resonance

OFF, 18

For some instruments, Material and Strainer Adj. cannot be edited. You can assign the footswitch or a pad to turn off the snares strainer (Strainer Adj. = OFF). Please refer to Assigning a Function to a Footswitch or Pad [F3 (CONTROL)] (p. 110).

49

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

TOM
fig.02-015-tom-f1.eps_70

HI-HAT
fig.02-019-hh-f1.eps_70

Parameter

Value

Description

Parameter [F1 (SIZE)] button

Value

Description

[F1 (SHELL)] button Shell Depth NORMAL, DEEP12 Depth of the shell

Size [F2 (ADD)] button

140

Hi-hat diameter

[F2 (HEAD)] button CLEAR, COATED, PINSTRIPE -480+480 OFF, TAMBOURINE, CABASA, COWBELL

Head Type

Type of head

Add Sound

Head Tuning

Tuning of the head Level Muffling (muting) setting [F3 (FIXED)] button Resonance to the snare NORMAL Fixed Hi-Hat -3+3

Allows you to add tambourine, cabasa, or cowbell to the hi-hat. The percussion groove will be added to the hi-hat. Adjusts the volume balance of the added sound.

[F3 (MUFFLE)] button Muffling Snare Buzz [F4 (MIC)] button OUTSIDE41, STANDARD, INSIDE14 Tonal change caused by microphone position OFF, TAPE12, FELT12 OFF, 18

The openness will be controlled by the pedal. The openness will be fixed.

FIXED14 [F4 (MIC)] button OUTSIDE21, STANDARD, INSIDE12

Mic Position

* PINSTRIPE is a registered trademark of Remo Inc., U.S.A.

Mic Position

Tonal change caused by microphone position

For some instruments, Mic Position cannot be edited. The Fixed Hi-Hat position can be enabled by pressing an optional footswitch or hitting a pad switch. Please refer to Assigning a Function to a Footswitch or Pad [F3 (CONTROL)] (p. 110).

50

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

CRASH/SPLASH/CHINA/STACKED CYMBAL/RIDE
fig.02-023-cym-f1.eps_70

Instruments for which V-EDIT is not available

Electronic instruments (Dynamic Pitch Bend)
Dynamic Pitch Bend is a function that you can use with the electronic instruments that were added on the TDW-20.

Parameter [F1 (SIZE)] button Size

Value

Description

You can make the following settings when youve selected the SNARE ELEC, KICK ELEC, or TOM ELEC instrument from the EXP instrument group. If Dynamic Pitch Bend is on, youll be able to change the pitch by varying the force (velocity) with which you strike the pad.
fig.02-027-dynapitch.eps_70

140

Cymbal diameter

[F2 (SIZZLE)] button Sizzle Type Sizzle Amount OFF, RIVET, CHAIN, BEADS -3+3 Type of sizzle Amount of sizzle

[F3 (SUSTAIN)] button Sustain [F4 (MIC)] button OUTSIDE21, STANDARD, INSIDE12 Tonal change caused by microphone position -31+31 Length of sustain Parameter Value Description

[F1 (PITCH)] button Basic Pitch Dynamic Bend -480 +480 OFF, ON Pitch Turns dynamic pitch bend on/off Amount of pitch change controlled by velocity Time over which currently controlled pitch change will occur

Mic Position

Bend Depth

-24 +24

Bend Time

-31 +31

[F2 (DECAY)] button Decay Time -31 +31 Length of the decay

Depending on the Basic Pitch setting of the instrument, there may be cases in which raising (or lowering) a value does not produce further change.

Other instruments
fig.02-028-decay.eps_70

Parameter Pitch Decay Time

Value -480+480 -31+31

Description Pitch Duration of the sound (decay time)

51

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

Using Pads/Pedal as Controllers [F3 (CONTROL)]

1. Press the [INST] button. 2. Press the [F3 (CONTROL)] button. 3. Select the pad that you want to edit.
Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. The edit screen for the selected pad will appear.

Parameter PadPtn Master Sw

Value

Description Specifies whether the Pad Pattern function will be used (ON) or not used (OFF). Selects the played back pattern when the pad is struck. If all pads are set to OFF, appears. The pattern plays back at the velocity set for the pattern, regardless of the strength with which the pad is struck. The pattern plays back with the velocity changing in response to the strength with which the pad is struck. This setting is valid only if TAP (p. 78) has been selected as the Play Type for a multiple number of pads. If one sound (pattern) is set to play before the previous sound (pattern) has finished playing, this setting allows you to either have the previous sound stop and the subsequent sound start playing or have the two sounds layered. Patterns set to the same number The previous sound stops while in progress, and the subsequent sound (pattern) starts playing. Patterns set to the different numbers The previous sound continues to play to the end, while the subsequent sound (pattern) is superimposed on it. icon

OFF, ON

Pad Ptn

OFF, P 1150, U 101 200

OFF Pad Ptn Velocity ON

4. Press the [F1][F5] and [CURSOR (up/down)]

buttons to select the parameter.

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

settings.

6. When finished, press the [EXIT] button to return to

the INST screen.
Tap Ptn Mute Grp

Playing a Pattern by Hitting a Pad (Pad Pattern) [F1 (PATTERN)]

The Pad Pattern function starts playback of a pattern when a pad is struck. This function provides a very convenient way to use patterns during a live performance. If different patterns have been assigned to two or more pads, striking another pad while a pattern is playing back will cause pattern playback to switch to the newly selected pattern.
fig.02-029-padptn.eps_70

OFF, 18

For more about patterns, refer to Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer (p. 69).

Using the Hi-Hat Pedal to Change an Instruments Pitch [F2 (PDLBEND)]

The performance of a pattern played back by the Pad Pattern function cannot be recorded into the sequencer.
fig.02-030-pedal.eps_70

Parameter

Value

Description Specifies the amount of pitch change produced by the hi-hat pedal. You can set this for each pad (head and rim separately) in semitone units.

Pedal Bend Range

-240+24

52

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

Enabling/Disabling Tonal Change Controlled by Strike Position or Rim Shot Nuance [F3 (POSI)]
You can set this for the snare (head, rim), tom (rim), ride (bow), and AUX (rim) trigger inputs.
fig.02-031-posctrl.eps_70

Parameter

Value 0 (C -)127 (G 9)

Description Transmitted MIDI note number Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad (See the text box About gate time)

Note No. OFF

Gate Time

0.18.0 (s)

MIDI note numbers transmitted by hi-hat [F2 (HH MIDI)]

Parameter Value Description Each of these settings enables (ON) or disables (OFF) tonal change controlled by the respective strike position or rim shot nuance. SNARE (Head): Strike position SNARE (Rim): Rim shot nuance TOM (Rim): Rim shot nuance RIDE (Bow): Strike position AUX (Rim): Rim shot nuance Parameter Open (Bow) 0 (C-)127 (G9) Note No. OFF Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad (See the text box About gate time) Bow shot of closed hi-hat 0 (C-)127 (G9) Note No. Gate OFF 0.18.0 (s) Transmitted MIDI note number Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad Edge shot of open hi-hat 0 (C-)127 (G9) Note No. OFF Gate Closed (Edge) 0.18.0 (s) Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad Edge shot of closed hi-hat 0 (C-)127 (G9) Note No. OFF Parameter Value CH1CH16 Tx Channel GLOBAL Description MIDI transmit channel for each pad. Transmits on the same channel as the drum kit part (p. 115). Gate Pedal 0 (C-)127 (G9) Note No. OFF Gate 0.18.0 (s) Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad 0.18.0 (s) Note messages are not transmitted. Duration of the note sent from each pad Pedal hi-hat (Foot closed) Transmitted MIDI note number Transmitted MIDI note number Transmitted MIDI note number Value Description Bow shot of open hi-hat Transmitted MIDI note number

Position Ctrl

OFF, ON

Gate

0.18.0 (s)

Closed (Bow)

Making MIDI Settings for Each Pad [F5 (MIDI)]

fig.02-032-note.eps_70

Open (Edge)

MIDI settings for each pad [F1 (MIDI)]

53

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

MIDI note number transmitted by brush sweep/cross stick [F5 (BR MIDI)]
Parameter Value Description MIDI note number transmitted by brush sweep Note messages are not transmitted. MIDI note number transmitted by cross stick Note messages are not transmitted.

Copying an Instrument
You can copy an instrument from preset memory or from a CompactFlash card. When copying an instrument, you can choose whether to include the COMP/EQ settings (p. 59). For user memory, you can rearrange the data by exchanging the copy-source and copy-destination instruments. Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

0 (C -)127 (G 9) Brush Note No. OFF

0 (C -)127 (G 9) XStick Note No. OFF

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.
fig.02-035-copy-a.eps_70

When setting multiple pads to the same note number

When the note number is set to be more than one pad received, the instrument assigned to the pad with the lowest TRIGGER INPUT number is played. When note numbers for the head and rim are duplicated, the head instrument is played. An asterisk (*) appears at the right of the note number for TRIGGER INPUTS that are not sounded. Example: Note number 38 (D 2) is set for the head and rim of trigger input 2 SNARE and the head of trigger input 3 TOM 1. In this case, when note number 38 (D2) is received, the instrument assigned to the head of trigger input 2 SNARE is played.

2. Press the [F2 (INST)] button.

fig.02-036-inst-copy.eps_70

Copy source

Copy destination

About the Gate Time

Percussion sound modules normally produce sound only in response to Note on messages, and ignore Note off messages. However general-purpose sound modules or samplers do receive the note-off messages that are transmitted and respond by turning off the sound. For example, if you are triggering a loop in a sampler, or other sounds then the gate time parameter is very important. With the factory defaults (preset values), the transmitted gate time is set to the minimum value.

The screen above can be accessed from the INST screen (p. 46) or the [COMP/EQ] button setting screen (p. 59) by pressing the [COPY] button while you hold down the [SHIFT] button.

3. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. You can choose from TDW-20s preset data or TD-20 preset data. Select this if you want to return to the factory-set kit settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

[F1 (USER)]

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

54

Chapter 2. Instrument Settings [INST]

4. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

[VALUE] dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.
If you selected [F2 (PRESET)] in step 3, specify whether youre copying from TD-20 or from TDW-20. If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 3, select the copy-source backup number.

Copying a Set of Multiple Instruments

You can copy multiple instruments to another drum kit in a single operation. Proceed as described in Copying an instrument, but do the following in steps 2 and 4. In step 2, choose [F3 (INST SET)]. In step 4, move the cursor to the far right of the copy-source, and select the instrument set that you want to copy.
Value Description Copy Kick and Snare. Copy Tom 1, 2, 3, and 4. Copy Hi-Hat, Crash1, 2, Ride, and Edge. Copy AUX 1, 2, 3, and 4.

5. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

[VALUE] dial to select the copied content (Copy Target).
Value with Pad Comp/EQ Description The pads instrument settings (Instrument, VEdit), Pad Compressor, and Pad EQ settings (p. 59) will be copied. Only the pads instrument settings (Instrument, V-Edit) will be copied. Only the Pad Compressor and Pad EQ settings (p. 59) will be copied.

KICK/SNR TOMS 14 CYM SET AUX 14

Inst V-Edit Only Pad Comp/EQ Only

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 3, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying an instrument from a CompactFlash card)
fig.02-037-inst-copy-conf.eps_70

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

55

Chapter 3. Mixer Settings

For each drum kit, settings such as the volume and pan (stereo position) of each pad can be stored together. Settings such as volume and pan are made in the mixer. Pressing the [F5 (H & R)] ( ) button in the [F1 (VOLUME)], [F2 (PAN)], or [F3 (MIN VOL)] setting screen, you can choose to set the head and rim simultaneously or individually.

Setting the Volume and Pan of Each Pad [MIXER]

Heres how to set the volume or pan (position in sound field) on an individual pad basis.

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.

Editing with the Group Faders (MIX EDIT)

Normally, the GROUP FADERS are used to adjust the volume balance of the TD-20Xs output. However, you can also use these faders temporarily to edit the drum kits mixer settings. This state is called MIX EDIT.

1. Press the [MIXER] button.

The [MIXER] button lights.
fig.03-001-mixer-vol.eps_70

1. Press the [MIXER] and [FADER] buttons

simultaneously.
The [MIXER] button lights, and the [FADER] button flashes.

2. Use the [F1][F4] buttons to select the parameter. 3. Select the pad that you want to edit.
Strike the pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. You can also use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select a pad.

The upper indicator of the sliders will be lit (p. 30). (You cant make the lower indicator light.)
fig.03-005-mix-edit-vol.eps_70

4. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to make the setting.
Parameter Value Description

2. Press the [F1][F3] buttons to select the parameter. 3. Move the fader which corresponds to the pad you
wish to adjust.
You can also use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/ down)] buttons.
Parameter Value Description

[F1 (VOLUME)] button VOLUME [F2 (PAN)] button PAN L15CTRR15 Pan of each pad 0127 Volume of each pad

[F3 (MIN VOL)] button Minimum volume of each pad This allows you to increase the volume of the weakest strike while maintaining the volume of the strongest strike. You can use this to make a snares ghost notes or cymbal legato strikes more easily audible.

[F1 (VOLUME)] button VOLUME 0127 Volume of each pad

[F2 (MIN VOL)] button MINIMUM VOLUME 015 Minimum volume of each pad

MINIMUM VOLUME

015

[F3 (AMB SND)] button AMB SEND LEVEL 0127 Send level to the ambience for each pad

[F4 (KIT VOL)] button Kit Volume Pedal HH Volume XStick Volume 0127 0127 0127 Volume of the entire drum kit Volume of the hi-hats foot closed sound Volume of cross stick sound

[F4 (MFX SND)] button MFX SEND LEVEL 0127 Send level to the multieffects for each pad

These settings are always common to the head and rim.

56

Chapter 3. Mixer Settings

4. Press the [EXIT] or [FADER] button to return to the

DRUM KIT screen.

4. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button

After pressing the [EXIT] or [FADER] button, the values for the GROUP FADERS sliders may not reflect the actual volume of the sound assigned to that fader. Be sure to move the faders a bit before making your setting.

[F1 (USER)]

Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. You can choose from TDW-20s preset data or TD-20 preset data. Select this if you want to return to the factory-set kit settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

Copying Mixer Settings

The drum kit mixers VOLUME (volume of each pad) and PAN (stereo position of each pad) settings can be copied to another drum kit in a single operation. You can also copy from a drum kit in preset memory or a CompactFlash card. If youre copying from user memory, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination settings. Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

5. Use the [CURSOR], [-] [+] buttons, and the [VALUE]

dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.
If you selected [F2 (PRESET)] in step 4, specify whether youre copying from TD-20 or from TDW-20. If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 4, select the copy-source backup number.

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 4, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying mixer settings from a CompactFlash card)
fig.03-011-copy-vol-conf.eps_70

2. Press the [F5 (A<>B<>C)] button to access the

COPY B screen.
fig.03-009-copy-b.eps_70

3. Press the [F1 (VOLUME)] or [F2 (PAN)] button to

select the settings that you want to copy.
(Example: When [F1 (VOLUME)] is selected)
fig.03-010-copy-vol.eps_70

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

Copy source

Copy destination

The screen above can be accessed from the VOLUME or PAN setting screen (p. 56) by pressing the [COPY] button while you hold down the [SHIFT] button.

57

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

The TD-20X provides the following effects, and allows you to make detailed settings for each effect.

The TD-20Xs effects

COMP/EQ (Pad compressor/equalizer): These settings are made for each pad. They are called pad compressor/equalizer in order to distinguish them from the master compressor/equalizer. AMBIENCE: These settings are made for each drum kit, and you can specify how deeply the effect will apply to each instrument. MULTI EFFECTS: These settings are made for each drum kit, and you can specify how deeply the effect will apply to each instrument. MASTER COMP/EQ: This is a compressor and equalizer that are applied to the final output of the sound. These settings are made for each drum kit.

Turning Effects On/Off [EFFECTS SWITCH]

These switches allow you to turn the Pad Comp/EQ, ambience, multi effects, and master comp/EQs on/off within each drum kit.

1. Press the [EFFECTS SWITCH] button.

The [EFFECTS SWITCH] button lights, and the EFFECTS SWITCH screen appears.
fig.04-001-fxsw.eps_70

2. Press the [F1][F5] buttons to turn the following

on/off.
[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] [F5] Pad Compressor (*1) Pad Equalizer (*1) Ambience Multi-effects Master comp/EQ

See also the section Effects (p. 36) in An overview of the TD-20X.

*1: All pad compressors or pad equalizers are turned on/off simultaneously.

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.
Effect on/off status appears in the DRUM KIT screen.
fig.04-002-kit-fxsw.eps_70

ON

OFF

58

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Adjusting Volume Change and Tone [COMP/EQ]

Heres how to adjust the volume change and tone for each pad.

For more detailed setting, adjust the parameters below.

Parameter Gain Thre (Threshold) Ratio Value -15 +20 (dB) Description Output level of the compressor Volume level at which compression begins Compression ratio Time from when the volume goes up the threshold level until the compressor effect applies Time compression is kept Time from when the volume falls below the threshold level until the compressor effect no longer applies

1. Press the [COMP/EQ] button.

The [COMP/EQ] button lights.

-300 (dB) 0.5:150:1

2. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it.

Atck (Attack)

0255 (ms)

Hold

29999 (ms)

3. Use the [F2], [F3], or [CURSOR] buttons to select the

parameter.
Function button [F2 (COMP)] [F3 (EQ)] [F5 (H & R)] Pad compressor parameters appear. Pad equalizer parameters appear. You can choose to set the head and rim simultaneously or individually. Rels (Release) 29999 (ms)

About threshold and ratio

As shown in the diagram below, these parameters determine how the volume is to be compressed.
fig.Compressor.e

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.
The sound may be distorted in a certain setting.

0.5:1

1:1 Ratio

Adjusting the Volume Change (Compressor) [F2 (COMP)]

A compressor adjusts the envelope (changes in the volume over time) and changes the character of the sound in response to playing dynamics.
fig.04-003-padcomp.eps_70

Output Level

1.7:1

4:1 50:1

Threshold
Parameter Value EMPHASIS Attack CRUSH COMP SOFT 12, COMP MED, COMP HARD, LIMITER, EXPANDER KICK 13, SNARE13, TOM 13, CYM 12, OTHER13 The Time setting will be set to restrain the attack. Description The Time setting will be set to emphasize the attack.

Input Level

Type

This changes Thre and ratio values.

Time

This changes Atck, Hold, and Rels values.

59

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Adjusting the Tone (Equalizer) [F3 (EQ)]

You can use three-band equalizers (for high, middle, and low frequency ranges) to adjust the sound.
fig.04-004-padeq.eps_70

Type of Acoustics for the Room (Ambience) [AMBIENCE]

You can choose the type of room where the drums are to be played and modify the sound.

1. Press the [AMBIENCE] button.

The [AMBIENCE] button lights.
fig.04-005-amb.eps_70

Parameter

Value 0.58.0 (only for MID) 201k (LOW), 208k (MID), 1k8k (HIGH) -15 +15 (dB)

Description Width of the frequency range A higher Q narrows the affected area. Point at which the boost/cut will occur Amount of boost/cut

Freq (Frequency) Gain

2. Use the [F2][F4] buttons or the [CURSOR] buttons

to select the parameter.

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.

Turning the Compressor/Equalizer On/ Off for Each Pad

1. Press the [COMP/EQ] button.
The [COMP/EQ] button lights.

Parameter

Value

Description

[F2 (TYPE)] button BEACH, LIVING ROOM, BATH ROOM, STUDIO, GARAGE, LOCKER ROOM, THEATER, CAVE, GYMNASIUM, DOME STADIUM, BOOTH A, BOOTH B, STUDIO A, STUDIO B, BASEMENT, JAZZ CLUB, ROCK CLUB, BALLROOM, GATE, CONCERT HALL, SPORTS ARENA, EXPO HALL, [FX]BOTTLE, [FX] CITY [FX] SPIRAL 0127 0, +6

2. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it.

3. Press the [F1] button to turn the compressor on/off

for each pad.
Type

4. Press the [F4] button to turn the equalizer on/off

for each pad.
Indication , Description The COMP/EQ settings are on, and the EFFECTS SWITCH (p. 58) is on. Effects will be applied. The COMP/EQ settings are on, and the EFFECTS SWITCH (p. 58) is off. Effects will not be applied. The COMP/EQ settings are off. Effects will not be applied. Level OutGain (dB)

Type of acoustics for the room

Total ambience level Boosts the amount of ambience.

Pressing the [F5 (H & R)] button, you can choose to set the head and rim simultaneously or individually.

60

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Parameter

Value

Description

[F3 (ROOM)] button TINY, SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE, HUGE 0100 CURTAIN CLOTH, WOOD, PLASTER, CONCRETE, GLASS NEXT DOOR, LOW FLOOR, LOW, MID LOW, MID, MID HIGH, HIGH, CEILING A, CEILING B

Auditioning the Ambience Effect [F5 (AMB MON)]

In the ambience edit screen, pressing the [F5 (AMB MON)] button will cause the MASTER OUT jacks and PHONES jack to output only the sound with ambience applied. This is a convenient way to audition the effect while you edit the settings. You can use this while setting the [F2 (TYPE)] or [F3 (ROOM)] button.

Room Size

Room size

Room Shape

Shape of room and length of reverberation

Wall Type

Wall material

This is a temporary function that works only in the ambience edit screen. It will automatically be defeated when you access a different screen.
Ambience mic position

Mic Position

[F4 (AMB SND)] button Send Level 0127 Ambience send level for each instrument

When in the F3 (ROOM) screen, pressing [SHIFT] button plus [F4] button resets all the parameters. Pressing the [F5 (H & R)] button in the [F4 (AMB SND)] setting screen, you can choose to set the head and rim simultaneously or individually.

Turning the Ambience switch on/off

1. Press the [AMBIENCE] button.
The [AMBIENCE] button will light.

2. Press the [F1] button to turn ambience on/off.

This is the same setting as turning ambience on/off in the EFFECTS SWITCH screen (p. 58).

61

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Applying Effects to the Sound (Multi-Effects) [MULTI EFFECTS]

The multi-effects allow you to further customize your sound and also provides a choice of output configurations.

Turning the multi-effects switch on/off

1. Press the [MULTI EFFECTS] button.
The [MULTI EFFECTS] button will light.

2. Press the [F1] button to turn multi-effects on/off.

This is the same setting as turning multi-effects on/off in the EFFECTS SWITCH screen (p. 58).

1. Press the [MULTI EFFECTS] button.

The [MULTI EFFECTS] button lights.
fig.04-008-mfx.eps_70

Auditioning the Multi-Effects [F5 (AMB MON)]

In the multi-effects edit screen, pressing the [F5 (MFX MON)] button will cause the MASTER OUT jacks and PHONES jack to output only the sound with multi-effects applied. This is a convenient way to audition the effect while you edit the settings. You can use this while setting the [F2 (MFX)] or [F3 (OUTPUT)] button.

2. Use the [F2][F4] and [CURSOR] buttons to select

the parameter.

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.
Parameter Value Description

[F2 (MFX)] button REVERB, GATE REVERB, DELAY, PANNING DELAY, BEAT DELAY, FLANGER, PHASER, CHORUS, ENHANCER, PITCH SHIFT, OVERDRIVE, DISTORTION, LO-FI, RING MOD 0127

This is a temporary function that works only in the multieffects edit screen. It will automatically be defeated when you access a different screen.

Type

Type of multi-effects

Level

Total effect level

[F3 (OUTPUT)] button OutGain (dB) 0, +6 Boosts the volume of the effect.

[F4 (MFX SND)] button Send Level 0127 Effect send level for each instrument

Pressing the [F5 (H & R)] button in the [F4 (MFX SND)] setting screen, you can choose to set the head and rim simultaneously or individually.

62

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Multi-Effects Parameters
REVERB
Adds reverberation to the sound, simulating an acoustic space.
Parameter Value Description Type of reverb 1: Lite 2: Medium 3: Deep 4: Shallow 5: Thin Time until the reverb is heard Duration of reverberation Frequency above which the reverb is reduced in level Frequency above which the high-frequency content of the reverb sound is filtered out

DELAY
Adds the delay sound.
Parameter Time Value 02000 (ms) Description Time until the delay sound is heard Amount of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect (minus: inverts the phase)

Feedback

-9898 (%)

Room Type

15

PANNING DELAY
This is a delay effect with echoes that pan left and right.
Parameter TimeL 01500 (ms) TimeR Level L 0127 Level R Value Description Time until the delay sound is heard Volume level of the delay sound Amount of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect (minus: inverts the phase)

PreDly Time HiDamp

0100.0 (ms) 0127 4.0 k12.5 k (Hz), THRU 16012.5k (Hz), THRU

HiCut

Feedback

-9898 (%)

GATE REVERB
This is a special type of reverb in which the reverb is cut off without being allowed to decay naturally.
Parameter Value Description Type of reverb 1: Lite 2: Medium 3: Deep 4: Shallow 5: Thin Duration of reverberation Frequency above which the high-frequency content of the reverb sound is filtered out Frequency above which the reverb is reduced in level Volume level at which the reverb starts to be gated Time from when the reverb level falls below the Threshold until the gate starts to close Time from the start to the completion of the gate closing process Level 1 0127 Level 2 Pan 1 L15CTRR15 Pan 2

BEAT DELAY
This is a delay effect that synchronizes with a tempo in sequencer.
Parameter Time Value 32th notehalf note -half note0 +half note Description Time until the delay sound is heard Time of shifting the interval between the 1st and 2nd delay Volume level of the delay sound Stereo position of the delay sound Amount of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect (minus: inverts the phase)

Room Type

15

Shift

Time

0127 16012.5k (Hz), THRU 4.0k12.5k (Hz), THRU -60 +12 (dB)

HiCut

HiDamp Thre (Threshold)

Feedback

-9898 (%)

Hold

0.052.00 (s)

Rels (Release)

0200 (ms)

If you set the pattern tempo, Time, and Shift to make the delay time over 1500 ms, the delay time cannot be more than 1500 ms.

63

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

FLANGER
Produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls somewhat like a jet airplane taking off or landing.
Parameter Delay LFO Rate Depth Value 015.0 (ms) 1128 0127 Description Tone of the flanger Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Amount of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect (minus: inverts the phase) Spatial spread of the sound

PITCH SHIFT
Shifts the pitch of the original sound.
Parameter Value Description Setting a higher value results in a slower response, but steadier pitch. Time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard Amount of pitch shift (semitone steps) Amount of pitch shift (2-cent steps) Amount of the pitch-shifted sound that is fed back into the effect (minus: inverts the phase)

Mode

15

Delay

0100.0 (ms)

Feedback

-9898 (%)

Coarse

-2412

Phase

0180

Fine

-100100

PHASER
Adds a phase-shifted sound to the original sound, producing a swirling modulation.
Parameter Freq LFO Rate Depth Resonance Value 1008000 (Hz) 1128 0127 0127 Description Basic frequency at which the sound will be modulated Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Amount of feedback

Feedback

-9898 (%)

OVERDRIVE
Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers.
Parameter Drive HF Level Value 0127 0127 Description Amount of distortion Level of high frequency range Bypass for the low frequency range When this is set to OFF, the low frequency range also has a distortion sound. Adding the spatial spread of the sound

CHORUS
Gives richness and spaciousness to the sound.
Parameter Delay LFO Rate Depth Phase Value 8.030.0 (ms) 1128 0127 0180 Description Tone of the chorus Frequency of modulation Depth of modulation Spatial spread of the sound Expanse OFF, ON LF Bypass OFF, ON

DISTORTION
Produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive.
Parameter Value 0127 0127 Description Amount of distortion Level of high frequency range Bypass for the low frequency range When this is set to OFF, the low frequency range also has a distortion sound. Adding the spatial spread of the sound

ENHANCER
Controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies, adding sparkle and brightness to the sound.
Parameter Sens Value 0127 Description Sensitivity of the enhancer Volume level of the low frequency range of the direct sound

Gain HF Level

LF Bypass

OFF, ON

LF Level

0127

Expanse

OFF, ON

64

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

LO-FI
Intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes.
Parameter Fs Rate Bit BPF Cutoff Value OFF, 1/21/32 OFF, 151 0100 Description Sample rate Number of bits in data Cutoff frequency of the BPF (Band Pass Filter) Amount of mixing the sound that goes through the BPF

Adjusting the Overall Sound [MASTER COMP/EQ]

You can make settings for the stereo compressor/limiter and three-band parametric EQ (equalizer) that are applied to the final stage of the master output. These settings can be used for individual kits and/or all kits.

BPF Mix

0127

Using the Master Comp/EQ

Using the master compressor
When used as a compressor, this allows you to raise the overall loudness of the drums by compressing brief peaks in the sound. This lets the sound project better, without being buried in the mix by the other instruments. When used as a comp-limiter, this lets you increase the recording level while limiting the maximum input to the recording device. If youre using a small monitor amp, you can use this effect as a limiter so that the peaks of the drum sound are limited, making the sound less likely to distort.

RING MOD
Applies amplitude modulation (AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like sounds.
Parameter Freq Value 0127 Description Frequency at which modulation is applied

Using the master EQ

This lets you adjust the tonal character by boosting or cutting each of the three bands (low, mid, and high-frequencies). You can also use this to make compensations in the tone when using the master comp.

Turning the Master Comp/EQ Switch On/Off

1. Press the [MASTER COMP/EQ] button.
The [MASTER COMP/EQ] button will light.

2. Press the [F1] button to turn the MASTER COMP/EQ

on/off.
This is the same setting as turning MASTER COMP/EQ on/off in the EFFECTS SWITCH screen (p. 58).

65

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Editing the Master Comp/EQ Settings

1. Press the [MASTER COMP/EQ] button.
The [MASTER COMP/EQ] button lights.
fig.04-011-mastercomp.eps_70

Parameter Gain

Value -12 +12 (dB)

Description Amount of boost/cut

The sound may be distorted in a certain setting. You can choose whether the master compressor/ equalizer settings will be independent for each kit, or be shared for all kits (p. 112).

2. Use the [F2], [F3], or [CURSOR] buttons to select the

parameter.

Gain Reduction Meter and Output Meter

In the F2 (M COMP) screen, the Gain Reduction Meter and the Output Meter are displayed. The gain reduction meter shows the change in level (dB) produced by the master compressor. The output meter shows the output level following the master compressor and EQ. Adjust the master compressors Gain so that the output meter does not exceed 0 dB (i.e., so that it does not clip).
fig.04-012-mastercomp.eps_70

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.
Parameter Value Description

[F2 (M COMP)] button Threshold Gain -480 (dB) -24 +24 (dB) 1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 8:1, :1 Ratio If Ratio is set to 1:1 the master comp effect will not be applied (only the Gain setting will be valid), regardless of the other settings. Knee SOFT, HARD The sounds attack at the moment compression begins. Time from when the volume goes up the threshold level until the compressor effect applies Time from when the volume falls below the threshold level until the compressor effect no longer applies Volume level at which compression begins Output volume of compressor Compression ratio

Gain reduction meter Output meter

The output meter shows only the level of the output signal from the MASTER OUT jacks and DIGITAL OUT jack. It does not show the level of the output signal from the PHONES jack or the DIRECT OUT jacks.

Attack

0.1, 0100 (ms)

Restoring the Settings to Their Default Values

Heres how to restore the master compressor settings to the default state (an appropriate amount of effect). For details on the actual values, refer to the Master compressor setting examples below.

Release

10100 (ms)

[F3 (M EQ)] button SHELV (Shelving), Type PEAK (MID: fixed to PEAK) 0.58.0 (only when Type is set to PEAK) 201k (LOW), 2016K (MID), 1k16k (HIGH) (Hz) The vicinity of the selected frequency range is boosted/ cut Width of the frequency range A higher Q narrows the affected area. Entire range above/below the selected frequency range is boosted/cut

1. Press the [MASTER COMP/EQ] button.

The [MASTER COMP/EQ] button will light.

2. Press the [F5 (DEFAULT)] button.

A confirmation screen will appear.

3. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

In the M EQ screen, pressing the [F5 (DEFAULT)] button will set the master EQ Gain to 0.

Freq (Frequency)

Point at which the boost/cut will occur

66

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

Master compressor setting examples

Here are some example settings for using the master compressor in various ways. Based on these settings, you can adjust the Threshold and Gain values appropriately.

Restricting the maximum volume to below the Threshold level

This is useful when youre sending the sound from the MASTER OUT jacks or DIGITAL OUT jack to be recorded directly, or when you want to prevent your monitor amp sound from distorting.
Parameter Threshold Value -10 0 :1 Hard 0.1 30

Increasing the loudness

Parameter Threshold Gain Ratio Knee Attack Release Value -22 +6 2:1 Soft 1 100

Gain Ratio Knee Attack Release

These settings are the defaults that can be obtained by pressing the [F5 (DEFAULT)] button when Master Comp/ EQ (p. 112) is set to EACH KIT.

These settings are the defaults that can be obtained by pressing the [F5 (DEFAULT)] button when Master Comp/ EQ (p. 112) is set to GLOBAL.

Compressing the volume peaks to limit excessive input levels

This is useful when youre sending the sound to an external mixer or monitor amp for recording or live performance.
Parameter Threshold Gain Ratio Knee Attack Release Value -15 +3 4:1 Hard 20 50

The TD-20Xs preset memory drum kits are adjusted so that if you turn the master comp/EQ on, the loudness will increase without appreciably changing the peak levels. You can specify whether the master comp/EQ settings will be independent for each drum kit, or will be used by all kits in common (p. 112). The master comp/EQ effect is applied to the sound that is sent from the MASTER OUT jacks, the DIGITAL OUT jack, and the PHONES jack. The master comp/EQ effect is not applied to the DIRECT OUT 18 jacks.

67

Chapter 4. Effect Settings

4. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Copying Effect Settings

Function button

Heres how a drum kits ambience settings (AMBIENCE) or multi-effect settings (MFX) can be copied to another drum kit in a single operation. You can also copy from a drum kit thats in preset memory or on a CompactFlash card. If youre copying from user memory, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination settings. Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

[F1 (USER)]

Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. You can choose from TDW-20s preset data or TD-20 preset data. Select this if you want to return to the factory-set kit settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.

5. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

[VALUE] dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.
If you selected [F2 (PRESET)] in step 4, specify whether youre copying from TD-20 or from TDW-20. If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 4, select the copy-source backup number.

2. Press the [F5 (A<>B<>C)] button to access the

COPY B screen.
fig.04-013-copy-b.eps_70

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 4, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy.

3. Press the [F3 (AMB)] or [F4 (MFX)] button to select

the settings that you want to copy.
(Example: When [F3 (AMB)] is selected)
fig.04-014-copy-amb.eps_70

A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying effect settings from a CompactFlash card)
fig.04-015-copy-amb-conf.eps_70

Copy source

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.
Copy destination

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

The Send Level (p. 61) is included in the ambience settings copied by this operation. Similarly, the Send Level (p. 62) is also included in the multi-effect settings copied by this operation. The comp/EQ settings for each pad (instrument) can be copied as described in Copying an Instrument (p. 54).

The screen above can be accessed from the ambience setting screen (p. 60) or the multi-effects setting screen (p. 62) by pressing the [COPY] button while you hold down the [SHIFT] button.

68

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

The TD-20Xs sequencer organizes music into six parts. The Drum Kit part is used to record/play back what is played on the pads. Additionally, Melody Part, Bass Part, Backing 1 Part, and Backing 2 Part are the four backing instrument parts, and there is another Percussion part. The collective performance of these six parts is called a pattern.

Basic Operation
fig.06-001

Preset Patterns (Pattern P 1150)

Settings in Preset patterns cannot be modified. These patterns are provided for use in practicing or live performances. You cannot erase nor make changes in the performance data of a Preset pattern. Recording to them is also not allowed.
Button [PATTERN] Description Selects patterns. This displays the basic screen for the sequencer. Stops playback of the pattern. When pressed while the pattern is stopped, this returns you to the beginning of the pattern. Starts playback of the pattern. Enters record-standby mode. Sets the Tempo (p. 79). When pressed while the pattern is stopped, this returns you to the beginning of the pattern. When pressed while the pattern is stopped, this returns you to the previous measure in the pattern. When pressed while the pattern is stopped, this advances you to the next measure in the pattern. When pressed while the pattern is stopped, this advances you to the end of the pattern.

User Patterns (Pattern U 151250)

These are patterns for you to use as you wish. You can record directly from the pads or an external MIDI keyboard in real time (p. 83). User pattern settings are saved automatically.

[STOP]

[PLAY] [REC]

Using Preset Patterns

As you cannot record over a preset pattern, the following appears in the display if you press the [REC] button.
fig.05-001-error-preset.eps_70

[TEMPO]

[CURSOR (up)]

[CURSOR (left)]

[CURSOR (right)]

If you want to change, edit, or record any Preset pattern settings, copy them to a User pattern (p. 86).

[CURSOR (down)]

About Preset Pattern Copyright

The sounds, phrases and patterns contained in this product are sound recordings protected by copyright. Roland hereby grants to purchasers of this product the permission to utilize the sound recordings contained in this product for the creation and recording of original musical works; provided however, the sound recordings contained in this product may not be sampled, downloaded or otherwise re-recorded, in whole or in part, for any other purpose, including but not limited to the transmission of all or any part of the sound recordings via the internet or other digital or analog means of transmission, and/or the manufacture, for sale or otherwise, of any collection of sampled sounds, phrases or patterns, on CD-ROM or equivalent means. The sound recordings contained in this product are the original works of Roland Corporation. Roland is not responsible for the use of the sound recordings contained in this product, and assumes no liability for any infringement of any copyright of any third party arising out of use of the sounds, phrases and patterns in this product. The [CURSOR] buttons cannot be used while the pattern is played back.

69

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Choosing a Pattern [PATTERN]

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.
The [PATTERN] button lights, and the PATTERN screen appears.
fig.05-002-pattern.eps_70

When you have finished making the settings, press the [PATTERN] button to bring up the PATTERN screen. This prevents data from being overwritten inadvertently during performance.

Selecting a Pattern from the List [F1 (LIST)]

Here you can select patterns from a list of pattern names. Pattern number, pattern name, beat, measure length, pattern playback type, and tempo are displayed.

2. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the pattern.
If you press the [F5 (NEW)] button, an empty pattern with the lowest number is called up.

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.

The PATTERN screen appears.

2. Press the [F1 (LIST)] button.

The PATTERN LIST screen appears.
fig.05-004-ptn-list.eps_70

About the PATTERN screen

fig.05-003-pattern.eps_70

F E G
Function button

[F1 ( PAGE)] [F2 (PAGE )]

The previous page of the list appears. The next page of the list appears. Switches between preset patterns and user patterns. An empty pattern with the lowest number is called up.

Pattern Number Pattern Name Pattern Type

Currently selected pattern number. [F4 (PRE<>USR)] The name of the currently selected pattern. [F5 (NEW)] P is displayed for preset patterns, and U is displayed for user patterns. When choosing an empty pattern, an asterisk (*) appears.

3. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to select the pattern.

D E F G

Pattern Playback Type (p. 78) Measure Number Beat Part Mute Status (p. 71) Playback begins from the measure indicated here when the [PLAY] button is pressed.

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

screen.

Function button [F1 (LIST)] [F2 (PART)] [F3 (FUNC)] [F4 (EDIT)] [F5 (NEW)] View the pattern list. Make settings for each part of the pattern (p. 71). Make settings for a user pattern (p. 77). Edit a user pattern (p. 85). Select an empty pattern (p. 83). Use this when you want to record a new pattern.

70

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Playing Back a Pattern [PLAY]

1. Select the pattern to play. 2. Press the [PLAY] button.
The [PLAY] button lights, and playback of the pattern begins.
fig.05-005-ptn-play.eps_70

If a preset pattern is selected, you wont be able to change any settings other than [F1 (MUTE)]. Unavailable editing icons are shown as .

Muting a Specific Part [F1 (MUTE)]

You can mute specific parts in patterns.

1. In the PATTERN PART screen, press the [F1

(MUTE)] button.
The PART MUTE screen appears.
fig.05-008-part-mute.eps_70

3. Press the [STOP] button to stop playback of the

pattern.
The [PLAY] button goes off, and returns to the beginning of the measure played at that moment.

4. Press the [STOP] button once again to return to

beginning of the pattern.
For details on the tempo settings for playing a pattern, refer to Specifying the Tempo [TEMPO] (p. 79).

2. Press the [F1][F5] buttons to turn each part muted

or played.
Function button [F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] [F5] Melody Part Bass Part Backing 1 Part + Backing 2 Part Percussion Part Drum Kit Part

Making Settings for Each Part [F2 (PART)]

If you want to change the settings for each part of a pattern (mainly for a user pattern), access the PATTERN PART screen as follows.

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.

The PATTERN screen appears.

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

PART screen.
You can check the part mute status in the PATTERN screen.
fig.05-009-ptn-mute.eps_70

2. Press the [F2 (PART)] button.

The PATTERN PART screen appears. Pressing the [EXIT] button will take you back to the PATTERN screen.
fig.05-006-ptn-part.eps_70

MUTE

PLAY

Function button [F1 (MUTE)] [F2 (BACKING)] [F3 (PERC)] [F4 (MIXER)] Mute (silence) a specific part. Make instrument settings for the backing parts (p. 72). Make settings for the percussion part (p. 73). Make volume and pan settings for each part (p. 76). Make reverb/chorus settings for the backing parts (p. 77).

Display ML BS BK PC DR

Part Melody Part Bass Part Backing Part Percussion Part Drum Kit Part

[F5 (REV/CHO)]

71

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Specifying the Instruments for the Backing Parts [F2 (BACKING)]

Heres how to select the instruments to be used by backing parts (parts other than the drum and percussion parts), and make settings for the Key Shift (change pitch in semitone steps).

Instrument Numbers/Instrument Names

You can change the tone by changing the instrument number. Selecting different variations within each instrument number changes the instrument name, with a different tone being selected. Instrument numbers correspond to the program numbers (1-128).

1. In the PATTERN PART screen (p. 71), press the [F2

(BACKING)] button.
The MELODY (BASS, BACKING 1, BACKING 2)PART screen appears.
fig.05-010-part1.eps_70

Variation Tones
These are slightly varied tone types found in an instrument number. The number of variation tones varies with the instrument number.
fig.05-011-part1-vari.eps_70

2. Press the [F1][F4] buttons to select the part you

wish to set.
Function button [F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] Melody Part Bass Part Backing 1 Part Backing 2 Part

Instrument name

Number of variation tones

Tuning Settings for the Backing Parts (Master Tuning)

Here you can adjust the overall tuning for the backing parts.

3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

1. In the PATTERN PART screen (p. 71), press the [F2

(BACKING)] button.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Value Refer to Backing Instrument List (p. 138) -240 +24 Description

2. Press the [F5 (M TUNE)] button.

The MASTER TUNE screen appears.
fig.05-012-tune.eps_70

Inst

Part Instrument

Key Shift

Shifts the overall pitch (in semitone steps). Amount of change in pitch with pitch bend at the maximum level (in semitone steps).

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

setting.
Parameter Master Tune Value 415.3466.2Hz

Bend Range

0 +24

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

PART screen.

You can set this to 440.0 Hz by pressing the [F5 (440 Hz)] button.

4. Press the [EXIT] button twice to return to the

PATTERN PART screen.

72

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Percussion Part Settings [F3 (PERC)]

Choosing a Percussion Set
An assembled group of different percussion instruments is called a percussion set. Since each note number has been assigned a different percussion instrument, a multiple number of instruments can be played at one time.

Percussion Set Settings

1. In the PERCUSSION PART screen, press the [F5
(EDIT)] button.
The PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen appears.
fig.05-014-percinst.eps_70

1. In the PATTERN PART screen (p. 71), press the [F3

(PERC)] button.
The PERCUSSION PART screen appears.
fig.05-013-percset.eps_70

2. Make settings of the percussion set. 3. When finished, press the [EXIT] button to return to
the PERCUSSION PART screen.

2. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the percussion set.

Selecting a percussion instrument

Select an instrument for each note number.

About the Percussion Sets

The TD-20X features eight percussion sets. You can select which percussion set is to be used in each pattern in the PERCUSSION PART screen.
Pattern
Pattern 1 Pattern 2

1. In the PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen, use the

[CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the note number.

2. Use the [VALUE] dial or the [-] [+] buttons to select

the instrument.
You can listen the sound of instrument by pressing the [PREVIEW] button.

Percussion Set
Percussion Set 1 Percussion Set 2 Percussion Set 3

Pattern 151 Pattern 152

Percussion Set 4 Percussion Set 5 Percussion Set 6

Pattern 250

Percussion Set 7 Percussion Set 8

Changing a percussion sets instrument settings simultaneously changes the percussion instruments in patterns using the same percussion sets. The preset patterns use percussion sets 15. If you change the percussion set settings, it is recommended that you first copy the percussion set you want to change to percussion set 6 or other percussion set, then change the settings in the copy.

73

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Selecting a percussion instrument from the list [F1 (LIST)]

Here you can select from the list of all available instruments.

Settings the volume and pan for each percussion instrument [F2 (EDIT)]
Set the volume, pan, pitch, decay, etc. for each percussion instrument.

1. In the PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen (p. 73), use

the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the note number.

1. In the PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen (p. 73), press

the [F2 (EDIT)] button.
The PERCUSSION SET INST EDIT screen appears.
fig.05-016-perc-note.eps_70

2. Press the [F1 (LIST)] button.

The PERCUSSION SET INST LIST screen appears.
fig.05-015-perc-instlist.eps_70

2. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter.

Function button [F1 (< PAGE)] [F2 (PAGE >)] [F5 (OFF)] Previous page of the list appears. The next page of the list appears. Selects the instrument #561 (OFF).

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Perc Note Value 0 (C -)127 (G 9) Refer to Drum Instrument List (p. 131). 0127 L15CTRR15 -480+480 -31+31 0127 Description Note number to be set

3. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR]

buttons to select the instrument.

(Inst)

Instrument

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen.

Volume Pan Pitch Decay Time Cho Send Level Rev Send Level

Stereo position Amount of chorus

0127

Amount of reverb Specifies how the instrument which changes the tone like a snare (striking position) or hihat (pedal position) sounds.

CC

0127

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen.

74

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Naming a percussion set [F3 (NAME)]

Each percussion set can be named (up to 12 characters).

Copying a percussion set

You can copy a percussion set from preset memory or from a CompactFlash card. For user memory, you can rearrange the data by exchanging the copy-source and copy-destination percussion sets.

1. In the PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen (p. 73), press

the [F3 (NAME)] button.
The PERCUSSION SET NAME screen appears.
fig.05-017-percname.eps_70

Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear (p. 91).
Function button [F1 (INSERT)] [F2 (DELETE)] [F3 (SPACE)] A blank space is inserted at the cursor position. Character at the cursor position is deleted. Character at cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Character at the cursor position changes between uppercase/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols.

If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.

2. Press the [F5 (A<>B<>C)] button twice to access the

COPY C screen.
fig.05-018-copy-c.eps_70

[F4 (CHAR)]

2. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.

3. Press the [F3 (PERC)] button.

fig.05-019-perc-copy.eps_70

3. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

Copy source

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

PERCUSSION SET EDIT screen.
Copy destination

4. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. Choose this if you want to return to the factory settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

[F1 (USER)]

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

75

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

5. Use the [CURSOR], [-] [+] buttons, and [VALUE] dial

to specify the copy-source and copy-destination.
If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 4, select the copy-source backup number.

Setting the Volume and Pan of Each Part [F4 (MIXER)]

Drum part cannot be set here. Set in the MIXER settings (p. 56). To adjust volume/pan settings for each instrument of the percussion part, refer to p. 73.

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 4, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying settings from a CompactFlash card)
fig.05-020-perc-copy-conf.eps_70

1. In the PATTERN PART screen (p. 71), press the [F4

(MIXER)] button.
The PART VOLUME, PART PAN, PART REVERB SEND LEVEL, or PART CHORUS SEND LEVEL screen appears.
fig.05-021-part-vol.eps_70

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

2. Press the [F1][F4] buttons to select the parameter. 3. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select the
part you wish to set.

4. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to make settings.
Parameter Value Description

[F1 (VOLUME)] button Volume of each part The percussion part (PERC) specifies the volume of the entire part.

PART VOLUME

0127

[F2 (PAN)] button PART PAN L15CTRR15 Panning of each part

[F3 (REV SND)] button PART REVERB SEND LEVEL

0127

Reverb depth of each part

[F4 (CHO SND)] button PART CHORUS SEND LEVEL

0127

Chorus depth of each part

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

PART screen.

76

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

5. Press the [F1] and/or [F5] buttons to turn the

Applying Reverb/Chorus to the Backing Parts [F5 (REV/CHO)]

Set the amount of reverb and chorus for each backing part.

reverb/chorus ON or OFF.
Function button [F1] [F5] Reverb On/Off Chorus On/Off

1. In the PATTERN PART screen (p. 71), press the [F5

(REV/CHO)] button.
The REVERB/CHORUS screen appears.
fig.05-025-back-fx.eps_70

6. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

PART screen.

Making Settings for a User Pattern [F3 (FUNC)]

2. Press the [F2][F4] buttons to select the parameter. 3. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter. 4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make
settings.
Parameter Value Description

Set various settings for a user pattern. If a preset pattern is selected, you wont be able to change. Unavailable editing icons are shown as .

Specifying the Number of Measures, Time Signature, and Tempo [F1 (SETUP)]
1. Press the [PATTERN] button.
The PATTERN screen appears.

[F2 (REV/CHO)] button REVERB ROOM1, ROOM2, STAGE1, STAGE2, HALL1, HALL2, DELAY, PAN-DELAY 0127

2. Press the [F3 (FUNC)] button.

Type of reverb

Type

3. Press the [F1 (SETUP)] button.

The PATTERN SETUP screen appears.
fig.05-026-ptn-setup.eps_70

Time CHORUS Type Rate Depth

Reverb length/delay time

TYPE13 164 164

Type of chorus Speed of modulation Depth of modulation

4. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter. 5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make
settings.

[F3 (REV SND)] button PART REVERB SEND LEVEL

0127

Amount of reverb applied to each part

Parameter Pattern Length Time Signature Tempo

Value 1999 Numerator: 115 Denominator: 2, 4, 8, 16 20260

Description Number of measures

[F4 (CHO SND)] button PART CHORUS SEND LEVEL

0127

Amount of chorus applied to each part

Beat

Time Signature can be set on an empty pattern. You cannot set 1/8 and 1/16-3/16.

77

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Specifying the Playback Type [F2 (TYPE)]

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.
The PATTERN screen appears.

Parameter

Value

Description When set to Pad Pattern (p. 52), the sounds are played back in sequence each time the pad is pressed. (You can use the [PLAY] button instead of a pad.) For example if you specify TAP for a pattern which contains a melody line and assign this pattern to a pad, you can play the notes of the melody in order each time you strike the pad. You can set the Tap Reset Time so that the pattern will automatically return to the beginning if that time interval elapses without that pad being hit again. You can play a bass line with your kick drum, too. When using Realtime Recording (p. 83) to record patterns used for TAP playback, make the Quantize settings (p. 84) before you begin recording. This is a TAP setting dedicated to the V-LINK function (p. 123). You will switch to the next image each time you strike the pad or press the [PLAY] button. This function automatically returns to the beginning of the pattern if that pattern has not been played for a certain length of time during Tap Play. When the time specified here has elapsed after the pattern was played most recently, the pattern will return to its beginning the next time you play it. If it is set to OFF, this function will be disabled. Turns on/off the function that will start playback at the first actual note in cases where there is an empty area at the beginning of the playback data. If this function is on, playback will begin immediately even if blank space occurred during recording. This is convenient when youve selected LOOP or ONESHOT as the Play Type.

2. Press the [F3 (FUNC)] button. 3. Press the [F2 (TYPE)] button.
The PATTERN TYPE screen appears.
fig.05-027-ptn-type.eps_70

TAP

Play Type

4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.
V-LINK

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter
Value Description

This specifies how the pattern will play back. After the pattern is played back all the way to the end, playback then repeats, starting at the beginning of the pattern. Playback continues until the [STOP] button is pressed. Loop is useful for practicing and live performance. Playback stops once the end of the pattern is reached. This is a convenient feature to use when assigning patterns to the pads (Pad Pattern; p. 52). Each time you hit the pad to which the pattern is assigned, it will automatically start from the beginning of the pattern. OFF, 0.24.0 (sec)

LOOP

Tap Reset Time

Play Type

ONESHOT

Quick Play

OFF, ON

If youve selected an empty pattern, Play Type cannot be set to TAP or V-LINK.

6. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

screen.
You can have the velocity of the pattern being played change according to the force with which the pad is tapped (Pad Pattern Velocity). Refer to p. 52.

78

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Naming a Pattern [F5 (NAME)]

Each pattern can be named (up to 12 characters).

Specifying the Tempo [TEMPO]

1. Press the [TEMPO] button.
The [TEMPO] button lights, and the TEMPO screen appears.
fig.05-029-tempo.eps_70

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.

The PATTERN screen appears.

2. Press the [F3 (FUNC)] button. 3. Press the [F5 (NAME)] button.
The PATTERN NAME screen appears.
fig.05-028-name.eps_70

Function button [F1 (CLICK)] [F2 (SYNC)] Make click settings (p. 81). Specify synchronization with external MIDI devices (p. 80). Specify the tempo by striking a pad or button (p. 80). Make the [TEMPO] button blink in time with the tempo (p. 81). Sound the click (p. 81).

[F3 (TAP)] Function button [F4] [F1 (INSERT)] [F2 (DELETE)] [F3 (SPACE)] A blank space is inserted at the cursor position. Character at the cursor position is deleted. Character at cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Character at the cursor position changes between upper case/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols. [F5]

2. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the tempo.

[F4 (CHAR)]

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.

4. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.

5. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

6. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PATTERN

screen.

79

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

2. Press the [F2 (SYNC)] button.

Setting the Tempo by Hitting a Pad (Tap Tempo) [F3 (TAP)]

You can set the tempo by hitting a pad or the [PREVIEW] button two or more times at quarter-note intervals of the desired tempo.

The TEMPO SYNC screen appears.

fig.05-031-sync.eps_70

1. Press the [TEMPO] button.

The [TEMPO] button lights, and the TEMPO screen appears.

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Value Description The TD-20Xs tempo setting will be used for playback/recording. The TD-20X will be the master. When shipped from the factory, this setting is selected. The TD-20Xs sequencer will operate in accordance with tempo data (MIDI Clock) from the external device. The TD-20X will be the slave. This is a convenient setting that combines features of both the INTERNAL and EXTERNAL settings. When no synchronization signal is being received, the TD-20Xs tempo setting will be used for playback/recording. When a synchronization signal is being received from an external device, the TD-20X will sync to that signal. The TD-20X will obey start/pause/ stop messages from an external device, but will playback according to its own tempo setting.

2. Press the [F3 (TAP)] button.

The TAP TEMPO screen appears.
fig.05-030-taptempo.eps_70

INTERNAL

3. Press the [CURSOR (up)] button to move the cursor

to Tap Switch.

EXTERNAL

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to set to

ON.
Sync Mode

5. Press the [CURSOR (down)] button to move the

cursor to Tap Pad.

AUTO

6. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the pad (or the [PREVIEW] button) to use for Tap Tempo function.

7. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TEMPO

screen.
When you strike the pad selected in step 6 (or the [PREVIEW] button) two or more times, the tempo will change to the corresponding interval.

REMOTE

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TEMPO

screen.

Synchronizing with an External MIDI Device [F2 (SYNC)]

This section discusses the settings that allow an external MIDI sequencer and the TD-20Xs sequencer to be synchronized. The device that is playing back is called the master and the device that is synchronizing to the playback is called the slave.

Synchronizing to the playback of an external sequencer

In this case, the TD-20X will be the slave and an external sequencer will be master.

1. Connect the TD-20Xs MIDI IN connector with a

MIDI cable to the MIDI OUT connector of the external sequencer.

1. Press the [TEMPO] button.

The [TEMPO] button lights, and the TEMPO screen appears.

2. Set Sync Mode to EXTERNAL. 3. Begin playback on the external sequencer.

Synchronized playback will begin.

80

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Starting and Stopping the Metronome (Click) On/Off [F5]

1. Press the [TEMPO] button.
The [TEMPO] button lights, and the TEMPO screen appears.

Making Click Settings [F1 (CLICK)]

1. Press the [TEMPO] button. 2. Press the [F1 (CLICK)] button.
The CLICK SETTINGS screen appears.
fig.05-034-click-inst.eps_70

2. Press the [F5] button to turn the click ON and OFF.

fig.05-032-click-on.eps_70

3. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the parameter

you want to set.

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.
You can also turn the click on/off by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [TEMPO] button.

4. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter. 5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make
settings.
Parameter Value Description

Viewing the Tempo as a Blinking Button [F4]

You can make the [TEMPO] button blink in time with the tempo.

[F1 (INST)] button VOICE, CLICK, BEEP, METRONOME, CLAVES, WOOD BLOCK, STICKS, CROSS STICK, TRIANGLE, COWBELL, CONGA, TALKING DRUM, MARACAS, CABASA, CUICA, AGOGO, TAMBOURINE, SNAPS, 909 SNARE, 808 COWBELL L15CENTERR15

1. Press the [TEMPO] button.

The [TEMPO] button lights, and the TEMPO screen appears.
Inst

2. Press the [F4] button to turn the [TEMPO] button

flashing (ON) or going off (OFF).
fig.05-033-tempo-ref-on.eps_70

Sound for the click

Pan

Stereo position of the click Amount of ambience The click sound will be easier to hear if you apply ambience. You have to turn the ambience on (p. 60).

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT

screen.
0127 Amb Send Level

When --- is displayed, this level is set to 0 automatically to prevent the click sound from leaking.

81

Chapter 5. Playing PatternsSequencer

Parameter

Value MASTER +PHONES, PHONES ONLY, DIRECT 5, DIRECT 6, DIRECT 5+6, DIRECT 7, DIRECT 8, DIRECT 7+8 MASTER+DIR56, MASTER+DIR78

Description

Output destination for the click This setting can also be made by pressing the [SETUP] button and pressing the [F2 (OUTPUT)] button (p. 108).

Output

[F2 (TIMESIG)] button Numerator: 015 Denominator: 2, 4, 8, 16 When the numerator is set to 0, no accent is added to the first beat.

Time Signature

Interval

1/2 (half note), 3/8 (dotted quarter note), 1/4 (quarter note), 1/8 (eighth note), 1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (16th note)

[F3 (COUNT)] button Count In Play Count In Rec During Play OFF, 1 MEAS, 2 MEAS OFF, 1 MEAS, 2 MEAS OFF, ON Adds a count in before playback. Adds a count in before recording. Sets the click to play during pattern playback. Sets the click to play during recording.

During Rec

OFF, ON

To adjust the click level, move the GROUP FADERS [CLICK] slider (p. 30).

6. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TEMPO

screen.

82

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

Recording a Pattern [REC]
What is played on the pads or on an external MIDI keyboard can be recorded (Realtime Recording). Your performance will be recorded exactly as you play it, including hi-hat control pedal movements and Positional Sensing. Please keep in mind that even though there are 100 user patterns, the amount of memory available will be determined by how much data is recorded into TD-20X. Storing performance data that describes every instance where the Hi-Hat Control Pedal is used, and that includes strike position detection rapidly consumes the User memory. You can use the [TOOLS] button to check the state of memory usage. For more information, refer to Viewing the Remaining Memory and the Program Version [F1 (INFO)] (p. 125).

(2) Set the time signature, the number of measures, and the tempo
1. In the PATTERN screen, press the [F3 (FUNC)]
button, and then press the [F1 (SETUP)] button.
The PATTERN SETUP screen appears.
fig.06-003-ptn-setup.eps_70

2. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter. 3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make
settings.
Parameter Pattern Length Value 1999 Numerator: 115 Denominator: 2, 4, 8, 16 20260 Description Number of measures Time signature This can be specified only for an empty pattern.

Time Signature

How to Record
Tempo

The procedure is the same when recording with pads or with a MIDI keyboard.

(1) Select an empty pattern

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.
The [PATTERN] button lights, and the PATTERN screen appears.
fig.06-001-ptn1.eps_70

Time Signature can be set on an empty pattern. You cannot set 1/8 and 1/163/16. If REC Mode (p. 84) is set to Replace, it is not necessary to specify the Pattern Length. Recording will continue until you press the [STOP] button, and the number of measures recorded will automatically become the Pattern Length setting. You can have a count sound (click) inserted before recording begins by setting Count In Rec. For more information, refer to Making Click Settings [F1 (CLICK)] (p. 81).

2. Press the [F5 (NEW)] button.

An empty pattern is automatically selected. You can also select by using the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial.
fig.06-002-ptn2.eps_70

If all the patterns have been used, pressing the [F5 (NEW)] button will have no effect. Delete an unneeded pattern (p. 88) before you record.

83

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

If you are recording from the pads, disregard paragraphs (3) and (4) of this section.

(5) Set the recording method

1. In the PATTERN screen, press the [REC] button.

(3) Select a MIDI channel

Be sure that the transmit channel on your keyboard corresponds to the MIDI channel of the part you wish to record. Each part has its own MIDI channel. The factory preset channels are as follows:
Part Drum Kit part Percussion part Melody part Bass part Backing 1 part Backing 2 part MIDI Channel CH 10 CH 11 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

The [PLAY] button flashes, and the [REC] button lights. The PATTERN REC STANDBY screen appears, and the click sound begins to play.
fig.06-004-rec-standby.eps_70

2. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Tempo Value 20260 Description Quantize is a function that corrects timing inaccuracies while you record. Set the note value before you begin recording and everything you play will be quantized automatically. The value should be set to the shortest note appearing in the phrase. When set to OFF, the pattern is recorded exactly as played.

You can change the MIDI channel by pressing the [SETUP] button. For more information, refer to MIDI Channel Settings [F1 (MIDI CH)] (p. 115). If you set Local Control to ON (PERC), youll be able to use the pads to record the percussion part. For more information, refer to MIDI Channel Settings for the Entire TD-20X [F2 (GLOBAL)] (p. 116).
8th note 64th note, OFF

Quantize

(4) Part Setting

Follow the procedures described in Making Settings for Each Part [F2 (PART)] (p. 71) to make settings of the parts.
LOOP ALL

When using Tap Playback to play back a pattern you have created, first make sure that this is not set to OFF, then quantize. If set to OFF, then Tap Playback (p. 78) cannot be executed correctly. The entire pattern will be repeated in loop mode and you can continually record (like overdubbing). Recording in a one or two measure loop mode. Recording will continue until you press the [STOP] button. Any previously recorded data for all Parts will be erased. When ON, recording starts the instant you strike a pad in recording stand-by mode. Press the [F5 (HITPAD)] button to turn on/off. This function can be used only when Local Control (p. 117) is set to ON (DRUM).

Rec Mode

LOOP 12,

REPLACE

Hit Pad Start

OFF, ON

84

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

(6) Recording
1. Press the [PLAY] button to begin recording.
The [PLAY] button stops flashing and remains lit, and the PATTERN RECORDING screen appears.
fig.06-005-rec.eps_70

Editing a Pattern [F4 (EDIT)]

When you want to edit a pattern, for example by copying a pattern or joining two patterns, access the PATTERN EDIT screen as follows.

1. Press the [PATTERN] button.

The PATTERN screen will appear.

2. Press the [F4 (EDIT)] button. 2. Play with pads or MIDI keyboards to record. 3. Press the [STOP] button to stop recording.
The [PLAY] and [REC] button go off. You can name the recorded pattern (p. 79). The PATTERN EDIT screen will appear.

PATTERN EDIT screen (Preset Pattern)

fig.06-007-ptn-edit-preset.eps_70

Checking the Tones and Phrases During Recording (Rehearsal)

The Rehearsal function temporarily suspends recording during the recording process, allowing you to rehearse and then quickly resume recording.

PATTERN EDIT screen (User Pattern)

fig.06-008-ptn-edit-user.eps_70

1. Start recording (p. 83).

The recording icon ( ) appears.
Function button Copies the pattern to a user pattern. You can also copy specified parts or measures (p. 86). Joins two patterns into one pattern (p. 87). Erases the performance data from a pattern. You can also erase the performance data from specified measures (p. 87). Deletes a pattern. You can also delete specified measures from a pattern (p. 88). Saves the pattern to a CompactFlash card (p. 89).

2. While recording is underway, press the [REC]

button.
The [REC] button flashes, and the rehearsal icon ( appears. Now, data from pads or keyboard cannot be recorded.
fig.06-006-reh.eps_70

[F1 (COPY)]

[F2 (APPEND)]

[F3 (ERASE)]

[F4 (DELETE)]

[F5 (CARD)]

3. Press the [REC] button to resume recording.

The [REC] button lights.

3. Pressing the [EXIT] button return to the PATTERN

screen.

85

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

5. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button.

Copying a Pattern [F1 (COPY)]

Copy the pattern as is to the user patterns.
fig.07-Cpy1

The confirmation screen appears.

fig.06-011-ptn-copy-conf.eps_70

1 Src

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

1 Dst

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

If the number of measures in the copy-source pattern and the copy-destination pattern differ, the number of measures in the copy-destination pattern may increase or decrease according to this difference. When ALL is specified in Src part, then only ALL may be specified in Dst Part. Additionally, if other than ALL is specified in Src part, then ALL cannot be specified in Dst Part. When copying between drum kit parts and percussion parts or backing parts, copy takes place in accord with the predetermined correspondence between note numbers and trigger inputs. Only note numbers assigned to trigger inputs will be copied. For more on note numbers and trigger inputs, refer to Note Number (Factory Settings) (p. 137).

You can copy selected measures of a part or pattern. Unlike copying an entire pattern, settings such as instrument and part volume etc. will not be copied.
fig.07-Cpy2

1 Src

1 Dst

1. In the PATTERN EDIT screen, press the [F1

(COPY)] button.
The PATTERN COPY screen appears.
fig.06-009-ptn-copy.eps_70

2. When you want to copy selected measures or part,

press the [F4 (MEASURE)] button.
The PATTERN COPY MEASURE screen appears.
fig.06-010-ptn-copy-meas.eps_70

3. Use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the parameter. 4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select
the pattern, part, and measures.
Pattern Src Copy-source pattern Copydestination pattern Part Copy-source part Copydestination part Measure Measures to be copied (First MeasureLast Measure) First measure of the copy-destination

Dst

86

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

Connecting Two Patterns [F2 (APPEND)]

This connects two patterns to create one pattern. The pattern specified as Dst will be first, and the pattern specified as Src will be connected to it. The new pattern will be created in Dst.
fig.07-Apd1

Erasing a Pattern [F3 (ERASE)]

This erases the pattern. Performance data is erased, while beat, measure length, and other settings are left intact.
fig.07-Ers1

Dst 1

4 +

Src 1

1 Dst

You can erase portions of the pattern, in measure units. The erased portions become blank measures.
fig.07-Ers2

1. In the PATTERN EDIT screen (p. 85), press the [F2

(APPEND)] button.
PATTERN APPEND screen appears.
fig.06-12-ptn-append.eps_70

Although the data is erased, the pattern length is unchanged.

2. Press the [CURSOR (up)] button to move the cursor

to Src.

1. In the PATTERN EDIT screen (p. 85), press the [F3

(ERASE)] button.
The PATTERN ERASE screen appears.
fig.06-14-ptn-erase.eps_70

3. Using the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial, select

the pattern that is to form the latter part of the conjoined result.

4. Press the [CURSOR (down)] button to move the

cursor to Dst.

5. Using the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial, select

the pattern that is to form the first part of the conjoined result.

2. When you want to erase selected measures or part,

press the [F4 (MEASURE)] button.
The PATTERN ERASE MEASURE screen appears.
fig.06-15-ptn-erase-meas.eps_70

6. Press the [F5 (APPEND)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-13-ptn-append-conf.eps_70

3. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select the

parameter.
To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

87

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the pattern, part, and measures.
Pattern Pattern to be erased Part Part to be erased Measure Measures to be erased (first measurelast measure)

1. In the PATTERN EDIT screen (p. 85), press the [F4

(DELETE)] button.
The PATTERN DELETE screen appears.
fig.06-17-ptn-delete.eps_70

5. Press the [F5 (ERASE)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-16-ptn-erase-conf.eps_70

2. When you want to delete selected measures, press

the [F4 (MEASURE)] button.
The PATTERN DELETE MEASURE screen appears.
fig.06-18-ptn-delete-meas.eps_70

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

Deleting a Pattern [F4 (DELETE)]

This deletes the pattern performance, beat, measure length, part, and all other settings, creating a empty pattern.
fig.07-Del1

3. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select the

parameter.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the pattern and measures.
Pattern Pattern to be deleted Measure Measures to be deleted (first measurelast measure)

5. Press the [F5 (DELETE)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-19-ptn-delete-conf.eps_70

You can delete unneeded measures from the pattern, then connects the portions before and after the resulting gap.
fig.07-Del2

8
To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

1 2 3 7 8

The performance data following the deleted range is moved forward (and the performance data for that part is shortened). When all parts in the targeted range are specified, deletion results in the pattern itself becoming shorter. When all measures for all parts are deleted, the pattern itself is deleted, resulting in a pattern containing no performance data (an empty pattern). Settings, including beat and measure length, are restored to their initial values as well.

88

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

Saving a Pattern [F5 (CARD)]

You can use an optional CompactFlash card to save pattern data. User patterns can be saved or loaded individually. This provides a convenient way to handle just the patterns you need.
fig.CardImage

Saving a Pattern to a CompactFlash Card [F1 (SAVE)]

Patterns will be saved up to 100.

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash

card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

CompactFlash Pattern 100 Pattern 001

2. Press the [PATTERN] button. 3. Press the [F4 (EDIT)] button.

The PATTERN EDIT screen appears.

4. Press the [F5 (CARD)] button.

Backup 99 Backup 01 If you insert a card being used for the first time by the TD-20X, display shows Unformatted! Refer to Formatting a CompactFlash Card [F1 (FORMAT)] (p. 94) and initialize it. The CompactFlash indicator light, and the PATTERN CARD screen appears.

Pattern (100)

5. Press the [F1 (SAVE)] button.

When creating a backup on a CompactFlash card (p. 92), user patterns are handled in sets of 100 patterns. PATTERN CARD screen
fig.06-20-ptn-cd.eps_70

The PATTERN SAVE screen appears.

fig.06-21-ptn-cd-save.eps_70

6. Press the [CURSOR (up)] button, and then use the

[-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select the pattern you want to save.
Never remove a CompactFlash card while the CompactFlash indicator on the TD-20Xs top panel is lit. Doing so may corrupt the units data or the data on the CompactFlash card. Carefully insert the CompactFlash card all the way inuntil it is firmly in place. The TD-20X can use CompactFlash cards rated for 3.3V in a capacity range of 16 MB4 GB (type 1). Other cards cannot be used.

7. Press the [CURSOR (down)] button, and then use

the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select a backup pattern to which you want to save the pattern.
You can select an empty backup pattern with the lowest number by pressing the [F4 (NEW)] button.

8. Press the [F5 (SAVE)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-22-ptn-cd-save-conf.eps_70

You can check the amount of CompactFlash card available by pressing the [TOOLS] button (p. 125).

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

9. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to save the

pattern.

89

Chapter 6. Recording and Editing PatternsSequencer

Loading a Pattern from a CompactFlash Card [F2 (LOAD)]

Patterns saved on a CompactFlash card can be loaded into the TD-20X.

Deleting a Pattern from a CompactFlash Card [F3 (DELETE)]

You can delete the unneeded pattern from a CompactFlash card.

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash

card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash

card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

2. Press the [PATTERN] button. 3. Press the [F4 (EDIT)] button.

The PATTERN EDIT screen appears.

2. Press the [PATTERN] button. 3. Press the [F4 (EDIT)] button.

The PATTERN EDIT screen appears.

4. Press the [F5 (CARD)] button.

The CompactFlash indicator light, and the PATTERN CARD screen appears.

4. Press the [F5 (CARD)] button.

The CompactFlash indicator light, and the PATTERN CARD screen appears.

5. Press the [F2 (LOAD)] button.

The PATTERN LOAD screen appears.
fig.06-23-ptn-cd-load.eps_70

5. Press the [F3 (DELETE)] button.

The PATTERN DELETE screen appears.
fig.06-25-ptn-cd-del.eps_70

6. Press the [CURSOR (up)] button, and then use the

[-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select the backup pattern you want to load.

6. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the unneeded backup pattern.

7. Press the [F5 (DELETE)] button. 7. Press the [CURSOR (down)] button, and then use
the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select the user pattern to which the backup pattern will be copied.
The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-26-ptn-cd-del-conf.eps_70

8. Press the [F5 (LOAD)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.06-24-ptn-cd-load-conf.eps_70

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

8. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to delete the

backup pattern.

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

9. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to load the

pattern.

90

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

You can use a CompactFlash card to do the following. Save (back up) 99 sets of the settings in user memory. Save 100 patterns (separately from the backups). Load backup data from a CompactFlash card into the TD-20X, or copy specified settings such as drum kits or instruments into user memory. Drum kits that you backed-up on a CompactFlash card can be played without loading them into the TD-20X (Kit Selection: p. 121). Backups you saved on the TD-20 can be imported into the TD-20X and used.
Function button (CARD A screen) [F1 (SAVE)] [F2 (LOAD)] [F3 (IMPORT)] [F4 (DELETE)] Saves the TD-20Xs data as a backup. Loads data from the CompactFlash card (p. 93). Imports TD-20 data into the TD-20X (p. 93). Deletes data from the CompactFlash card (p. 94). Switches between the CARD A screen and CARD B screen.

[F5 (A<>B)]

Function button (CARD B screen) [F1 (FORMAT)] Initializes the CompactFlash card (p. 94). Displays the usage status of the CompactFlash card (p. 95). Switches between the CARD A screen and CARD B screen.

Never remove a CompactFlash card while the CompactFlash indicator on the TD-20Xs top panel is lit. Doing so may corrupt the units data or the data on the CompactFlash card. Carefully insert the CompactFlash card all the way inuntil it is firmly in place. Only CompactFlash cards that are designed for 3.3 V and have a capacity of 16 MB4 GB (Type 1) can be used with the TD-20X. Other types cannot be used. If a CompactFlash card of larger than 2 GB capacity is formatted (p. 94) on the TD-20X, it will be formatted to 2 GB.

[F2 (INFO)]

[F5 (A<>B)]

If you insert a card being used for the first time by the TD-20X, display shows Unformatted! Refer to Formatting a CompactFlash Card [F1 (FORMAT)] (p. 94) and initialize it.

Save/Load and Copy Functions of the TD-20X

fig.CardImage

CompactFlash

Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash
card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

TD-20X LOAD
Setup Drum Kit Inst

Backup 99 Backup 01

SAVE

Setup Drum Kit Inst Percussion Set Trigger Setting Drum Kit Chain

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.
fig.07-001-card-a.eps_70

Percussion Set Trigger Setting Drum Kit Chain

COPY
Pattern
fig.07-002-card-b.eps_70

Pattern

Pattern load/save (p. 89)

Pattern 100 Pattern 001

Backup 8

IMPORT

Backup 1

CompactFlash card saved by the non-expan TD-20

91

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

Saving Data to a CompactFlash Card [F1 (SAVE)]

All user memory data (p. 31) will be saved up to 99 sets.

Naming a Backup [F4 (NAME)]

Each backup area can be given a name of up to 12 characters.

1. In the CARD SAVE confirmation screen, press the

[F4 (NAME)] button.
The CARD SAVE NAME screen appears.
fig.07-005-card-name.eps_70

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash

card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears. If you insert a card being used for the first time by the TD-20X, display shows Unformatted! Refer to Formatting a CompactFlash Card [F1 (FORMAT)] (p. 94) and initialize it.
Function button A blank space is inserted at the cursor position, and characters after this point are moved to the right one space. Character at the cursor position is deleted, and characters after this point are moved to the left one space. Character at the cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Type of character at the cursor position changes between upper case/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols. Pressed to save the data.

[F1 (INSERT)]

3. Press the [F1 (SAVE)] button.

The CARD SAVE screen appears.
fig.07-003-card-save.eps_70

[F2 (DELETE)]

[F3 (SPACE)]

[F4 (CHAR)]

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select a

backup number to which you want to save the data.
You can select an empty backup area with the lowest number by pressing the [F4 (NEW)] button.

[F5 (SAVE)]

2. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.

5. Press the [F5 (SAVE)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.07-004-card-save-conf.eps_70

3. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

4. When youre finished, press the [F5 (SAVE)] button

to return to the confirmation screen.

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. If you want to change the name of the backup area,

press the [F4 (NAME)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to save the data.

92

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

Loading Data from a CompactFlash Card [F2 (LOAD)]

Data saved on a CompactFlash card can be loaded into the TD-20X. You can also load data from a TD-20 that has a TDW-20 installed.

Loading TD-20 Backup Data [F3 (IMPORT)]

Data that was backed up by the (non-expanded) TD-20 can be imported into the TD-20X and used.

1. Insert the CompactFlash card containing data

saved by the TD-20 into the TD-20Xs front panel CompactFlash slot.

1. Insert the CompactFlash card into the

CompactFlash card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.

3. Press the [F3 (IMPORT)] button. 4. Use the [-] [+] buttons and [VALUE] dial to select the
backup that you want to import.
fig.07-008-card-import.eps_70

3. Press the [F2 (LOAD)] button.

The CARD LOAD screen appears.
fig.07-006-card-load.eps_70

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the backup area containing the data you want to load.

5. Press the [F5 (IMPORT)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.07-009-card-import-conf.eps_70

5. Press the [F5 (LOAD)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.07-007-card-load-conf.eps_70

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button; the data will be

imported from the card.
To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button. Drum kits backed up by the TD-20 will be loaded into drum kit numbers 51100. The TDW-20s preset kits will be loaded into drum kit numbers 150. The program change numbers specified for the drum kits will return to their initial values.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to load the data.

You can also load individual drum kits, percussion sets, etc. from a CompactFlash card. To do so, use the Copy function (p. 42, p. 75). You can audition the drum kits saved on a CompactFlash card before loading data from the CompactFlash card. For details, refer to Playing a Kit from the CompactFlash without Loading It (Kit Selection) [F1 (KIT SEL)] (p. 121).

93

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

Deleting Data from a CompactFlash Card [F4 (DELETE)]

You can delete the unneeded data from a CompactFlash card.

Formatting a CompactFlash Card [F1 (FORMAT)]

When a card is being used for the first time by the TD-20X, you must execute the following procedure to initialize the card. When a card is initialized, all data on that card will be lost. Make sure that it does not contain data you wish to keep. If a CompactFlash card of larger than 2GB capacity is formatted on the TD-20X, it will be formatted to 2GB.

1. Insert the CompactFlash card into the

CompactFlash card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash

card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

3. Press the [F4 (DELETE)] button.

The CARD DELETE screen appears.
fig.07-010-card-delete.eps_70

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.

3. Press the [F5 (A<>B)] button to access the CARD B

screen.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the backup area containing the unneeded data.

fig.07-012-card-b.eps_70

5. Press the [F5 (DELETE)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.07-011-card-delete-conf.eps_70

4. Press the [F1 (FORMAT)] button.

The CARD FORMAT screen appears.
fig.07-013-card-format.eps_70

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to delete the

backup.

5. Press the [F5 (FORMAT)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.07-014-card-format-conf.eps_70

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

6. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button again to start

formatting.

94

Chapter 7. Using CompactFlash Cards [CARD]

Checking the State of a CompactFlash Card [F2 (INFO)]

1. Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash
card slot on the TD-20Xs front panel.

Backup file names

This is important for those who might want to organize their data in their computers or share data with other TD-20X users.

2. Press the [CARD] button.

The [CARD] button and the CompactFlash indicator light, and the CARD A screen appears.

How names appear

Though you can give a name to your backup file that you can see when loading/saving with a CompactFlash card in the TD-20X, the name that appears when looking at it in your computer is different.

3. Press the [F5 (A<>B)] button to access the CARD B

screen.

Backups saved by a TD-20X 4. Press the [F2 (INFO)] button.

The CARD INFORMATION screen appears.
fig.07-015-card-info.eps_70

Backup 1 appears like TDW2BK01.TD0. TDW2 indicates the upgraded version. The BK01 means Backup No.1, BK99 would mean backup No.99. Backups that have been saved by a TD-20 that has been upgraded with a TDW-20 expansion card will have similar filenames.

Parameter Bank Pattern Size TD-20 Org Data

Description Number of saved backups Number of saved patterns Used memory size/total memory size Number of backups saved by the TD-20 (unexpanded).

Backups saved by an unexpanded TD-20 (without TDW-20)

Backup 1 appears like TD20BK01.TD0. TD20 indicates the original version. The BK01 means Backup No.1, BK08 would mean backup No.08.

5. Press the [EXIT] button twice (or just press the [KIT]
button) to return to the DRUM KIT screen.
The CompactFlash indicator goes off. For details on saving patterns, refer to Saving a Pattern to a CompactFlash Card [F1 (SAVE)] (p. 89).

Pattern files
This refers to patterns saved independently on the CompactFlash Card. Pattern No.1 (on the card) will appear as TD20P001.TD0. The P001 means pattern No.1. Pattern No.100 appears as TD20P100.TD0.

95

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Heres how to make trigger settings to ensure that the trigger signals from the pads and pedals are appropriately conveyed to the sound generator section. If you specify the model (type) of pad that is connected to each trigger input jack, the settings suitable for each pad will be made. To specify the pad type, use the [TRIGGER] button [F1 (BANK)]. If you want to make additional fine adjustments for each pad to further adjust the sensitivity etc., you can use the [F2 (BASIC)] or [F5 (ADVANCE)] button to do so.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the Trigger Bank.

5. Press the [CURSOR (right)] button to move the

cursor to a trigger type.

6. Select the pad for which you want to make settings.

Strike the pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. You can also use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the pad.

7. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

Selecting the Pad Type [F1 (BANK)]

To ensure that the signals from the pads can be processed appropriately by the TD-20X, you must specify the type of pad youre using (the trigger type) for each trigger input.

the trigger type.

Trigger Type KD140 KD120 KD85 KD8 KD7 PD125X PD120 PD105X Rim Shot Positional Sensing Head Rim Choke play

Used Modes KD-140 KD-120 KD-85 KD-80 KD-8 KD-7 PD-125X PD-125XS PD-125 PD-120 PD-105X PD-105 PD-100 PD-85 PD-80R PD-80 PDX-8 PD-9 PD-8 PD-7 CY-15R

Trigger Type
A trigger type is a group of trigger settings with values optimally adjusted for a particular pad. In order to make the most suitable settings for the pad connected to each trigger input, specify the model (type) of the pad that is connected. Only when factors unrelated to the selection of the proper trigger type prevent you from getting good results in performance should you fine-tune the individual parameters for the pad you are using.

PD85 PDX8 PD9 PD8 PD7 CY15R CY14C CY12RC CY8 CY5/6 CY12H VH12 VH11 PAD1 PAD2 RT10K RT10S RT10T

Trigger Bank
Trigger Banks allow you to store the 15 trigger settings as a single unit of information. The large number at the left edge of the above display is the Trigger Bank number. Move the cursor to this area to select the Trigger Bank.

1. Press the [TRIGGER] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights.

CY-14C CY-12R/C CY-8

2. Press the [F1 (BANK)] button.

The TRIGGER BANK screen will appear.
fig.08-001-bank.eps_70

CY-5 CY-6 CY-12H VH-12 VH-11 Non-Roland pad Non-Roland pad

Trigger bank number

Trigger Type

RT-10K RT-10S

3. Press the [CURSOR (left)] button to move the cursor

to the trigger bank number.

RT-10T

96

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

When you select the trigger type, the trigger parameters (except the crosstalk cancel parameters) are automatically set to the most efficient values for each pad. Make settings for the parameter as needed. When 3Way Trigger (p. 105) is set to ON, RD CTRL is displayed for the trigger type for trigger input 11 EDGE. It cannot be changed.

Pad Sensitivity Settings [F2 (BASIC)]

When you set the trigger type (p. 96), the following settings (basic trigger parameters) are automatically changed to values that are appropriate for each pad; this means that you will not normally need to change these settings. Adjust the following parameters if you want to make settings in more detail, or if youre using acoustic drum triggers.

Trigger Inputs and Playing Methods Corresponding Chart

Dual Trigger Mesh Pad Head Positional Sensing Rim Shot Nuance

1. Press the [TRIGGER] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights.

Trigger Input

2. Press the [F2 (BASIC)] button.

The TRIGGER BASIC screen will appear.
fig.08-002-basic.eps_70

KICK SNARE TOM 14 HI-HAT CRASH 1, 2 RIDE EDGE AUX 14

The graph in the right side of the screen is a velocity monitor that shows the force (velocity) of your strike. It shows the velocities of the sixteen most recent strikes.

3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

Brush sweep and Cross Stick can be used only SNARE. Each playing method can be used with the instruments corresponding to it (p. 131).

4. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. You can also use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the pad. The edit screen for the selected pad will appear.

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.

6. When youre finished, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the DRUM KIT screen.
Parameter Trig Type Sensitivity Threshold Value refer to p. 96 132 031 LINEAR, EXP1, EXP2, LOG1, LOG2, SPLINE, LOUD1, LOUD2 Pad sensitivity Minimum level for the pad Description

Curve

How playing dynamics changes the volume

97

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Adjusting the Pad Sensitivity (Sensitivity)

You can adjust the sensitivity of the pads to accommodate your personal playing style. This allows you to have more dynamic control over the sound volume, based on how hard you play. Sensitivity: 132 Higher sensitivity allows the pad to produce a loud volume even when played softly. Lower sensitivity will keep the pad producing a low volume even when played forcefully.

Specifying How Volume Responds to Velocity (Velocity Curve)

This setting allows you to control the relation between playing velocity (striking force) and changes in volume. Adjust this curve until the response feels as natural as possible.
fig.VeloC-LINEAR.e

Curve: LINEAR The standard setting. This produces the most natural correspondence between playing dynamics and volume change.
fig.VeloC-EXP.e

Volume

LINEAR Striking Force

Adjusting the Pads Minimum Sensitivity (Threshold)

This setting allows a trigger signal to be received only when the pad is above a determined force level (velocity). This can be used to prevent a pad from sounding because of vibrations from other pads. In the following example, B will sound but A and C will not sound.
fig.Threshold.e

Curve: EXP1, EXP2 Compared to LINEAR, strong dynamics produce a greater change.
fig.VeloC-LOG.e

Volume

EXP1 EXP2 Striking Force Volume LOG2

Curve: LOG1, LOG2 Compared to LINEAR, a soft playing produces a greater change.
fig.VeloC-SPLINE.e

LOG1 Striking Force

Threshold A B C

Curve: SPLINE Extreme changes are made in response to playing dynamics.

Volume

SPLINE

Threshold: 031 When set to a higher value, no sound is produced when the pad is struck lightly. Gradually raise the Threshold value while striking the pad. Check this and adjust accordingly. Repeat this process until you get the perfect setting for your playing style.

Striking Force
fig.VeloC-LOUD.e

Curve: LOUD1, LOUD2 Very little dynamic response, making it easy to maintain strong volume levels. If using drum triggers, these settings help maintain stable levels.

Volume LOUD2

LOUD1 Striking Force

98

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Hi-Hat Settings [F3 (HI-HAT)]

1. Press the [TRIGGER] button.
The [TRIGGER] button lights.

Parameter

Value

Description Amount of Data Resolution that is transmitted from Hi-Hat Pedal.

CC Resolution

NORMAL, HIGH
(Initial Value: NORMAL)

2. Press the [F3 (HI-HAT)] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights, and the TRIGGER HIHAT screen will appear.
fig.08-003-hh.eps_70

When you control the pitch by Hi-Hat Pedal (p. 52), the pitch can be changed smoothly if you set High.

Adjusting the offset of VH-12 automatically

If youre using the VH-12 V-hi-hat, execute the offset automatically adjustment from the TD-20X after making connections.

3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.
The editable parameters will depend on the Hi-Hat Type setting.

This adjustment is required in order to correctly detect open, close, and pedal operations.

1. In the TRIGGER HI-HAT screen, press the [F5

(OFFSET)] button.
The VH OFFSET ADJUSTMENT screen will appear.
fig.08-005-vh-offset.eps_70

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.

5. When youre finished, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the DRUM KIT screen.
Parameter Value Description

2. Loosen the clutch screw of the top hi-hat and let it

sit on the bottom hi-hat.
Do NOT touch the hi-hats or the pedal.

Used Hi-Hat Controller Hi-Hat Type VH12 VH11/FD VH-12 VH-11, FD-8

3. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

Settings for the VH-12

Set the Hi-Hat Type to VH12
Parameter Value Description Extent of Opening Hi-Hat The bigger the value is, the wider the opening extent is. Amount of how easy to make the Foot Splash Amount of strength to cancel the bow and edge noise when you play Foot Close. The bigger the value is, the more difficult to have a noise excluding the Foot Close.

The [TRIGGER] button flashes, and the VH Offset parameter is set automatically.
fig.08-006-vh-offset2.eps_70

Offset

-100 +100

When finished, the [TRIGGER] button stops flashing and remains lit, and the following screen appears.
fig.08-007-vh-offset-comp.eps_70

Foot Splash Sens

-10 +10
(Initial Value: +5)

Noise Cancel

13
(Initial Value: 1)

You can also perform this operation by holding down the [KIT] button and pressing the [TRIGGER] button (p. 25).

99

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

8. Set the TD-20Xs parameters as described below.

Settings for the VH-11

Parameter Value VH11/FD +8 90 NORMAL

When Hi-Hat Type is set to VH11/FD

Parameter Foot Splash Sens Value -10 +10
(Initial Value: +8)

Hi-Hat Type Foot Splash Sens CC Max CC Resolution

Description Amount of how easy to make the Foot Splash Amount of Control Change that is transmitted in stepping the pedal down completely. Amount of Data Resolution that is transmitted from HiHat Pedal.

CC Max

90, 127
(Initial Value: 90)

9. While reading the meter displayed on the right side

of the TD-20Xs screen, adjust the offset with the VH-11s VH offset adjustment screw.
Adjust the offset so that the black
fig.08-010-vh11-offset-2.eps_70

CC Resolution

NORMAL, HIGH
(Initial Value: NORMAL)

appear in the meter.

When you control the pitch by Hi-Hat Pedal (p. 52), the pitch can be changed smoothly if you set High.

Adjusting the offset of VH-11

If youre using the VH-11 V-hi-hat, execute the offset adjustment from the TD-20X after making connections. This adjustment is required in order to correctly detect open, close, and pedal operations.

For detailed descriptions regarding the VH-11, instructions on connections, and other information, refer to the VH-11 Owners Manual.

Settings for the FD-8

When Hi-Hat Type is set to VH11/FD
Parameter Foot Splash Sens Value -10 +10
(Initial Value: +8)

1. Connect the VH-11 and TD-20X. 2. After making the hi-hat settings, release your foot
from the pedal, and while keeping your foot off the pedal, turn on the power to the TD-20X.

Description Amount of how easy to make the Foot Splash Amount of Control Change that is transmitted in stepping the pedal down completely. Amount of Data Resolution that is transmitted from HiHat Pedal.

3. Loosen the clutch screw and let the hi-hat rest

naturally on the motion sensor unit.

CC Max

90, 127
(Initial Value: 90)

4. Press the [TRIGGER] button. 5. Press the [F1 (BANK)] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights, and the TRIGGER BANK screen appears.
CC Resolution NORMAL, HIGH
(Initial Value: NORMAL)

When you control the pitch by Hi-Hat Pedal (p. 52), the pitch can be changed smoothly if you set High.

6. Set the trigger type for hi-hat to VH11 (p. 96). 7. Press the [F3 (HI-HAT)] button.
The TRIGGER HI-HAT screen appears.

100

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

Eliminate Crosstalk Between Pads [F4 (XTALK)]

When two pads are mounted on the same stand, hitting one pad may trigger the sound from another pad unintentionally. (This is called crosstalk.) Eliminate this by adjusting Xtalk Cancel on the pad that is sounding inadvertently. In some cases, you can prevent crosstalk between two pads by increasing the distance between them.

the setting.
Parameter Value Description

[F1 (XTALK)] button 580 XTALK CANCEL OFF [F2 (MOUNT)] button Select the pad mount type here. SEPARATE MOUNT TYPE PAD CYMBAL [F3 (GROUP)] button XTALK GROUP 18 Crosstalk Cancel affects the pads set to the same number. Using a pad mount Using a cymbal mount Set independently Crosstalk cancellation will be turned off Strength of crosstalk cancelling (steps of 5)

1. Press the [TRIGGER] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights.

2. Press the [F4 (XTALK)] button.

If [F4 (XTALK)] is not shown, press the [F1 (BANK)] button once to access the TRIGGER BANK screen.

3. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the parameter.

fig.08-013-xtalk.eps_70

6. When youre finished, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the DRUM KIT screen.

Crosstalk example: If you hit the snare pad and the tom 1 also sounds
The graph in the right side of the screen is a velocity monitor that shows the force (velocity) of your strike. It shows the velocities of the sixteen most recent strikes. Set the snare and tom 1 to the same group. Raise the XTALK CANCEL for the pad being used for the tom 1. The tom 1 pad will be less prone to receive crosstalk from other pads. With a setting OFF, crosstalk prevention will not work. If the value is set too high, and two pads are played simultaneously, the one that is struck less forcefully may not sound. Be careful and set this parameter to the minimum value required to prevent crosstalk.

4. Select the pad for which you want to make settings.

Strike the pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. You can also use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the pad.

101

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Advanced Trigger Parameters [F5 (ADVANCE)]

The following parameters (advanced trigger parameters) are automatically set to the most efficient values for each pad when you select the Trigger Type (p. 96), and dont require adjustment, except if you experience any of the problems that are discussed in the explanation of each parameter.

Detailed Settings for Trigger Signal Detection [F1 (SCAN)]

fig.08-016-scan.eps_70

1. Press the [TRIGGER] button.

The [TRIGGER] button lights.

The graph in the right side of the screen is a velocity monitor that shows the force (velocity) of your strike. It shows the velocities of the sixteen most recent strikes.
Parameter Trig Type Scan Time Retrig Cancel Value refer to p. 96 04.0 (ms) 116 Trigger signal detection time Detecting trigger signal attenuation Double triggering prevention (p. 103) Description

2. Press the [F5 (ADVANCE)] button.

If [F5 (ADVANCE)] is not shown, press the [F1 (BANK)] button once to access the TRIGGER BANK screen.

3. Use the [F1][F4] buttons to select the parameter. 4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the
parameter.

Mask Time

064 (ms)

5. Select the pad that you want to edit.

Strike the desired pad, or use the TRIG SELECT buttons to select it. You can also use the [CURSOR] buttons to select the pad. The edit screen for the selected pad will appear.

Trigger signal detection time (Scan Time)

Since the rise time of the trigger signal waveform may differ slightly depending on the characteristics of each pad or acoustic drum trigger (drum pickup), you may notice that identical hits (velocity) may produce sound at different volumes. If this occurs, you can adjust the Scan Time so that your way of playing can be detected more precisely.
fig.ScanTime.e

6. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust

the setting.

7. When youre finished, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the DRUM KIT screen.

Scan Time

Time

Scan Time: 04.0 (ms) While repeatedly hitting the pad at a constant force, gradually raise the Scan Time value from 0 msec, until the resulting volume stabilizes at the loudest level. At this setting, try both soft and loud strikes, and make sure that the volume changes appropriately. As the value is set higher, the time it takes for the sound to be played increases. Set this to the lowest value possible.

102

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Detecting trigger signal attenuation (Retrigger Cancel)

Important if you are using acoustic drum triggers. Such triggers can produce altered waveforms, which may also cause inadvertent sounding at Point A in the following figure (Retrigger).
fig.Retrigger.e

Double triggering prevention (Mask Time)

When playing a kick trigger the beater can bounce back and hit the head a second time immediately after the intended notewith acoustic drums sometimes the beater stays against the headthis causes a single hit to double trigger (two sounds instead of one). The Mask Time setting helps to prevent this. Once a pad has been hit, any additional trigger signals occurring within the specified Mask Time (064 msec) will be ignored.
fig.MaskTime.e

Time

Mask Time

This occurs in particular at the decaying edge of the waveform. Retrigger Cancel detects such distortion in and prevents retriggering from occurring. Retrig Cancel: 116 While repeatedly striking the pad, raise the Retrig Cancel value until retriggering no longer occurs. Although setting this to a high value prevents retriggering, it then becomes easy for sounds to be omitted when the drums played fast (roll etc.). Set this to the lowest value possible while still ensuring that there is no retriggering. You can also eliminate this problem of retriggering with the Mask Time setting. Mask Time does not detect trigger signals if they occur within the specified amount of time after the previous trigger signal was received. Retrigger Cancel detects the attenuation of the trigger signal level, and triggers the sound after internally determining which trigger signals were actually generated when the head was struck, while weeding out the other false trigger signals that need not trigger a sound.

Time

Sound not produced

Mask Time: 064 (ms) Adjust the Mask Time value while playing the pad. When using a kick trigger, try to let the beater bounce back and hit the head very quickly, then raise the Mask Time value until there are no more sounds made by the beater rebound. When set to a high value, it will be difficult to play very quickly. Set this to as low a value as you can. If two or more sounds are being produced when you strike the head just once, then adjust Retrig Cancel.

103

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Detailed Settings for Rim Shots [F2 (RIM)]

fig.08-017-rim.eps_70

Cross stick threshold (XStick Thrshld)

When using a V-pad such as the PD-125X, you can adjust the force at which youll switch between the cross stick sound and the open rim shot sound. XStick Thrshld: 0127 Setting this to a higher value makes it easier to get cross stick sounds. When set to 0, playing a cross stick produces the open rim shot sound.

The graph in the right side of the screen is a velocity monitor that shows the force (velocity) of your strike. It shows the velocities of the sixteen most recent strikes.
fig.MaskTime.e

Increasing the value excessively may cause the cross stick to sound as well when the open rim shot is played.
High

Parameter Trig Type Rim Gain RimShot Adjust XStick Thrshld

Value refer to p. 96

Description

08.0 0127

Rim shots response (p. 104) Cross stick response (p. 104)

Volume Levels

03.2

Rim/Edge dynamic response (p. 104)

Rim Shot Sound Cross Stick Sound

Rim/Edge dynamic response (Rim Gain)

You can adjust the relation between your playing velocity (force) on the rim/edge and the resulting volume level. Rim Gain: 03.2 Higher value allows the rim/edge to produce a loud volume even when played softly. Lower value will keep the rim/edge producing a low volume even when played forcefully.

Low Soft Hard

Striking force

Cross Stick Threshold (0127)

Rim shots response (Rim Shot Adjust)

When using a V-pad such as the PD-125X, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rim response. RimShot Adjust: 08.0 There are some cases that you have a rim sound unexpectedly when you hit the head strongly. You can improve this situation with decreasing the value of RimShot Adjust. When you set the value too small, it might be difficult to play the rim sound.

104

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Settings for Separate Triggering of Ride Strikes [F3 (3-WAY)]

fig.08-018-3way.eps_70

Strike Position Detection On/Off [F4 (POSI)]

For the pads listed below, strike position detection (p. 34) can be turned on/off. If you turn strike position detection on, youll be able to produce tonal change by varying the strike position on the head or by changing the nuance of your rim shots.

Parameter 3Way Trigger (Ride & Edge)

Value

Description Enable/disable separate triggering of bow/bell/edge strikes on the ride cymbal

Pads that can detect the strike position

2 SNARE (head/rim) 36 TOM 14 (rim) 10 RIDE (bow) 1215 AUX 14 (rim) If you select a Trig Type that does not support positional sensing, the value will be shown as - - -, and you wont be able to edit the setting.
fig.08-019-posi.eps_70

OFF, ON

Playing bow, bell, and edge (3Way Triggering)

When using the CY-15R or CY-12R/C for the RIDE, you can three way triggering (bow, bell, and edge shot) performance are possible. 3Way Trigger: OFF, ON Connect as shown in page 21, set 3Way Trigger to ON.

Correspondences between playing method and trigger input

Playing Method Bow Shot Bell Shot Edge Shot TD-20X TRIGGER INPUT 10 RIDE head 10 RIDE rim 11 EDGE rim

Parameter Trig Type Position Detect Head

Value See p. 96.

Description

ON, OFF Rim

Positional sensing on/off

Head-side tone for the trigger input 11 EDGE cannot be sounded. When 3Way Trigger is set to ON, RD CTRL is displayed for the trigger type for trigger input 11 EDGE. It cannot be changed (p. 96).

105

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

Naming a Trigger Bank [F5 (Name)]

Each trigger bank can be named (up to 12 characters).

Copying a Trigger Bank

You can copy a trigger bank from preset memory or from a CompactFlash card. For user memory, you can rearrange the data by exchanging the copy-source and copy-destination trigger banks.

1. In the TRIGGER BANK screen (p. 96), select the

trigger bank you want to name.

2. Press the [F5 (ADVANCE)] button. 3. Press the [F5 (NAME)] button.
The TRIGGER BANK NAME screen appears.
fig.08-020-name.eps_70

Be aware that when you execute the copy, the contents of the copy-destination will be overwritten.

1. Press the [COPY] button.

The [COPY] button will light, and the COPY A screen will appear. If a CompactFlash card (p. 91) is inserted in the CompactFlash card slot, the CompactFlash indicator will also light.

2. Press the [F5 (A<>B<>C)] button twice to access the

COPY C screen.
Function button [F1 (INSERT)] [F2 (DELETE)] [F3 (SPACE)] A blank space is inserted at the cursor position. Character at the cursor position is deleted. Character at the cursor position is replaced by a blank space. Character at the cursor position changes between uppercase/lowercase alphabet, or numbers and symbols.
fig.08-21-copy-c.eps_70

3. Press the [F1 (TRIG)] button.

fig.08-22-copy.eps_70

[F4 (CHAR)]

Copy source

4. the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to move the

cursor to the character to be changed.

5. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/

down)] buttons to change the character.

Copy destination

4. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the copy-source.

Function button Copy from user memory. Exchanging the copy-source and copydestination is possible only if the copy-source is user memory. Copy from preset memory. Choose this if you want to return to the factory settings. Copy from backup data saved on a CompactFlash card.

6. When finished, press the [EXIT] button.

[F1 (USER)]

[F2 (PRESET)]

[F3 (CARD)]

106

Chapter 8. Trigger Settings for Each Pad [TRIGGER]

5. Use the [CURSOR] buttons, [-] [+] buttons, and

[VALUE] dial to specify the copy-source and copydestination.
If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 4, select the copy-source backup number.

6. Press the [F4 (EXCHNG)] or [F5 (COPY)] button.

If you selected [F1 (USER)] in step 4, you can exchange the copy-source and copy-destination by pressing the [F4 (EXCHNG)] button. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button to execute the copy. A confirmation message will appear. (Example: Copying a trigger bank from a CompactFlash card)
fig.08-Confirm_70

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

107

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

The setup settings apply to the entire TD-20X; they include the output destination assignments for the TD-20Xs sounds, and footswitch. To edit the setup settings, proceed as follows to access the SETUP screen.
[F2 (DIR 1-4)] button
fig.09-003-dir1.eps_70

1. Press the [SETUP] button.

The SETUP screen will appear.
fig.09-001-setup.eps_70

Output assignments from each pad to the DIRECT OUT 14 jacks. [F3 (DIR 5-8)] button
fig.09-004-dir2.eps_70

Function button [F1 (MIDI)] [F2 (OUTPUT)] [F3 (CONTROL)] Make MIDI settings (p. 115). Specify the output destination for the sounds Assign functions to the footswitch or pads (p. 110). Make settings for the preview button, master comp/EQs, MIX IN jack, and the display (p. 112). Return the TD-20X to its factory-set state (p. 114). (Factory Reset) Output assignments from ambience and MFX etc. to the MASTER and DIRECT OUT 58 jacks. [F5 (DEFAULT)] button Output assignments from each pad to the DIRECT OUT 58 jacks. [F4 (OTHER)] button
fig.09-005-other.eps_70

[F4 (OPTION)]

[F5 (F RESET)]

2. In the SETUP screen, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the DRUM KIT screen.

Output Assignments [F2 (OUTPUT)]

Here is where you can choose how the outputs will function. You can use the PHONES jack as a monitor output, or the MASTER OUT to only output the Ambience or Multi Effects or use DIRECT OUTS 7/8 to output the combined signals of the DIRECT OUT jacks. All sounds are always output from the Phones Jack.

When one of the [F1][F4] screens are displayed, pressing this button will return all displayed output assignments to their default settings (p. 109).

2. Use the [F1][F4] buttons to select the assignments

you want to make.

3. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select the

output assignment you want to change.
In the [F1 (MASTER)][F3 (DIR 5-8)] button screens, you can also make a selection by striking a pad or using the TRIG SELECT buttons. [F1 (MASTER)], [F2 (DIR 1-4)], and [F3 (DIR 5-8)] screens
Trigger input KICK SNARE TOM1 TOM2 TOM3

1. From the SETUP screen, press the [F2 (OUTPUT)]

button.
One of the following screens will appear.
[F1 (MASTER)] button
fig.09-002-master.eps_70

Indication

Trigger input HI-HAT CRASH 1 CRASH 2 RIDE EDGE

Indication

Trigger input AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4

Indication

K S 1 2 3 4

H C C R E

A A A A

Output assignments from each pad to the MASTER OUT jacks.

TOM4

108

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

[F4 (OTHER)] screen

Indication AMB MFX BACK PERC CLICK MIXIN Description Ambience (p. 60) Multi-effects (p. 62) The patterns backing parts (p. 72) The patterns percussion part (p. 73) Metronome click (p. 81) The sound being input to the MIX IN jack

Sending the same audio for monitoring and PA

With these settings, the same sound will be output from the PHONES jack, the MASTER OUT L/R jacks, and the DIRECT OUT 7/8 jacks. The sound being monitored by the performer will be the same as the sound sent to the PA system.
Example destination Monitor headphones Drum monitor PA (external mixer)

Jack

Output

4. Use the [VALUE], the [-] [+], or [CURSOR (up/down)]

buttons to select the output destination.

PHONES MASTER DIRECT OUT 1 DIRECT OUT 2 DIRECT OUT 3

All All All

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.
Block Diagram (p. 144)

DIRECT OUT 4 DIRECT OUT 5/6 DIRECT OUT 7/8

Example Settings
The MASTER OUT L/R jacks and the DIRECT OUT 18 jacks are unbalanced.

Sending Ambience and/or MFX separately

This chart shows how you can use the MASTER OUT L/R jacks. to output the Ambience and/or MFX (multi effects). This allows the PA engineer to balance the effects with the individual sounds.
Example destination Monitor headphones, drum monitor

Default settings
As the chart below illustrates, the PHONES jack and the MASTER OUT L/ R jacks will output all sounds. Individual sounds are assigned to DIRECT OUTS 1-8 for individual sound control with a PA system.
Example destination Monitor headphones Drum monitor

Jack

Output

Jack

Output

PHONES

All

PHONES MASTER DIRECT OUT 1 DIRECT OUT 2 DIRECT OUT 3 DIRECT OUT 4 DIRECT OUT 5/6 DIRECT OUT 7/8

All All KICK

MASTER DIRECT OUT 1 DIRECT OUT 2

Ambience, MFX KICK SNARE HI-HAT RIDE, EDGE TOM14 (Stereo) CRASH1, 2, AUX14 (Stereo PA (external mixer)

SNARE DIRECT OUT 3 HI-HAT RIDE, EDGE TOM14 (Stereo) CRASH1, 2, AUX14 (Stereo) DIRECT OUT 7/8 PA (external mixer) DIRECT OUT 4 DIRECT OUT 5/6

109

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

Assigning a Function to a Footswitch or Pad [F3 (CONTROL)]

Assigning a Function to a Footswitch [F1 (FOOT SW)]
You can use a special cable (PCS-31: sold separately) to connect two footswitches (BOSS FS-5U: sold separately), and assign the footswitches to various functions such as switching between drum kits or playing patterns.
fig.FootSw.e

the function for footswitches.

When setting to USER, use the [CURSOR] buttons to move the cursor to SW1 or SW2.
Function SW1 KIT SELECT SW2 SW1 CHAIN SELECT SW2 CHAIN# INC KIT# INC CHAIN# DEC Indication KIT# DEC Description Calls up the previous kit. Calls up the next kit. Calls up the previous drum kit chain. Calls up the next drum kit chain. Calls up the previous pattern. Calls up the next pattern. Calls up the next pattern. Plays back/stops the pattern. Specifies whether the hi-hats Fixed HiHat setting (p. 50) will be set to FIXED 2.

SW1 PATTERN SELECT SW2

PTN# DEC

PTN# INC

SW1 PATTERN PLAY SW2

PTN# INC

STOP/PLAY

PCS-31 (sold separately)

FIXED HH/ STRAINER SW1 When this function is selected, the FIX HH STNR icon will appear in the DRUM KIT screen. FIXED HH

SW2

STRAINER

Specifies whether the snares Strainer Adj. setting (p. 49) will be turned OFF.

SW1

AMBIENCE SW

FS-5U
Footswitch FS-5U x 2 (PCS-31) DP-2 SW1 o (red plug) SW2 o (white plug) o

AMB/MFX SW SW2 MFX SW

Turns the ambience effect switch (p. 61) on/off. Turns the multieffect switch (p. 62) on/off.

USER

Selects the function assigned to SW1 and SW2.

o: Functions

: Does not function

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F3

(CONTROL)] button.

2. Press the [F1 (FOOT SW)] button.

The FOOT SWITCH screen appears.
fig.09-006-foot.eps_70

110

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

Functions that can be assigned only if Function is set to USER

Indication PTN PLAY PTN STOP XSTICK SW Description Plays back the pattern. Stops the pattern. Switches to use/not use cross stick (p. 32).

Function

AUX 3 OFF Head 4 Rim 3 4 3 CHAIN# DEC CHAIN# INC

Description Calls up the next drum kit chain Calls up the previous drum kit chain Calls up the previous drum kit chain Calls up the next drum kit chain PTN# INC PTN# DEC Calls up the next pattern Calls up the previous pattern Calls up the previous pattern Calls up the next pattern Specifies whether the hihats Fixed Hi-Hat setting (p. 50) will be set to FIXED 2. Specifies whether the snares Strainer Adj. setting (p. 49) will be turned OFF. Specifies whether the hihats Fixed Hi-Hat setting (p. 50) will be set to FIXED 2. Specifies whether the snares Strainer Adj. setting (p. 49) will be turned OFF. AMBIENCE SW MFX SW AMBIENCE SW AMBIENCE SW MFX SW MFX SW Turns the ambience effect switch (p. 61) on/off. Turns the multi-effect effect switch (p. 62) on/off. Turns the ambience effect switch (p. 61) on/off.

CHAIN SELECT1

CHAIN SELECT2

CHAIN# DEC CHAIN# INC OFF Head

When using footswitches to switch kits in a Drum Kit Chain (p. 43), Function should be set to KIT SELECT, and you need to press the [CHAIN] button, so its indicator is lit. (The Drum Kit Chain settings need to be made beforehand.)

PATTERN SELECT1

Rim

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

PATTERN SELECT2 FIXED HH/ STRAINER1

3 4 3

PTN# DEC PTN# INC OFF

Using Pads as Switches [F2 (PAD SW)]

Pads connected to trigger input 14 AUX3 and/or 15 AUX4 can be set to switch drum kits and play back patterns.

Head When this function is selected, the FIX HH STNR icon will appear in the DRUM KIT screen. FIXED HH/ STRAINER2

FIXED HH

4 Rim STRAINER

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F3

(CONTROL)] button.

Head 3 Rim Head

FIXED HH FIXED HH STRAINER

2. Press the [F2 (PAD SW)] button.

The PAD SWITCH screen appears.
fig.09-007-pad.eps_70

When this function is selected, the FIX HH STNR icon will appear in the DRUM KIT screen.

Rim

STRAINER

OFF Head

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the function.
When setting to USER, use the [CURSOR] buttons to move the cursor to AUX3 and AUX4 and select the functions for the heads and rims.

KIT AMB/MFX SW1

4 Rim Head 3

Function OFF

AUX 3 4 3 OFF OFF OFF Head Rim KIT# DEC KIT# INC KIT# INC KIT# DEC

Description Calls up the next kit Calls up the previous kit Calls up the previous kit Calls up the next kit

KIT AMB/MFX SW1 4 USER

Rim Head Rim

Turns the multi-effect effect switch (p. 62) on/off.

Select from the table below.

KIT SELECT1

4 3 4

KIT SELECT2

111

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

Functions that can be assigned only if Function is set to USER

Indication XSTICK SW Description Switches to use/not use cross stick (p. 41).

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Dynamics ON Button responds to velocity. Velocity when Dynamics is set to OFF. Value OFF Description No velocity. Level is fixed.

If you dont want sound from the pad used as a pad switch, press the [MIXER] button and then press the [F1 (VOLUME)] button, and set the volume level for AUX4 and/or AUX3 to 0 (p. 56). Or press the [INST] button and select 561 Off for AUX4 and/or AUX3 (p. 46). When using pad switches to switch kits in a Drum Kit Chain (p. 43), FUNCTION should be set to KIT SELECT 1 or KIT SELECT 2, and you need to press the [CHAIN] button, so its indicator is lit. (The Drum Kit Chain settings need to be made beforehand.)

Velocity

1127

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

Making the Master Comp/EQ Settings Identical for All Kits [F2 (COMP/EQ)]
You can specify which is used for the master comp/EQ (p. 65), individual settings for each drum kit or common settings to all kits.

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F4

Other Settings [F4 (OPTION)]

Specifying the Preview Velocity [F1 (PREVIEW)]
Here, the [PREVIEW] button velocity can be set.

(OPTION)] button.

2. Press the [F2 (COMP/EQ)] button.

The MASTER COMP/EQ MODE screen appears.
fig.09-009-comp.eps_70

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F4

(OPTION)] button.

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Value EACH KIT Master Comp/EQ GLOBAL Description Master comp/EQ for each kit, individually. Master comp/EQ common to other drum kits is used.

2. Press the [F1 (PREVIEW)] button.

The PREVIEW screen appears.
fig.09-008-preview.eps_70

The graph in the right side of the screen is a velocity monitor that shows the force (velocity) of your strike.

When this is set to GLOBAL, GLOBAL appears on the icon at the left part of the master comp/EQ setting screen.
fig.10-Master2_70

3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

112

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

Using the MIX IN Jacks as Two Monaural Inputs [F3 (MIX IN)]
The MIX IN jacks can handle mono or stereo signal. If it occurs that the audio signal going to the MIX IN jack has a click on the Right side, and the backing track on the Left side, you can use this function to merge the signals.

Adjusting the Display Contrast [F5 (LCD)]

The display contrast is strongly influenced by the location of the TD-20X and the lighting of the room its in. Adjust this parameter when needed.

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F4

(OPTION)] button.

1. In the SETUP screen (p. 108), press the [F4

(OPTION)] button.

2. Press the [F5 (LCD)] button. 2. Press the [F3 (MIX IN)] button.
The MIX IN SETTING screen appears.
fig.09-010-mixin.eps_70

The LCD CONTRAST screen appears.

fig.09-011-lcd.eps_70

3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to adjust. 3. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the
parameter.
You can also adjust it by holding the [KIT] button and turning the [VALUE] dial.

4. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Value Description

4. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

Selects the jack(s) to use as an input. L+R Input L ONLY R ONLY STEREO Mode MONO Gain (dB) 0, +6, +12 Use as monaural x 2 Adjusts the input level Use only the left channel Use only the right channel Use as stereo input Use both channels

5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the SETUP

screen.

113

Chapter 9. Settings for the Entire TD-20X [SETUP]

5. Press the [F5 (ADJUST)] button.

Restoring the Factory Settings [F5 (F RESET)]

This restores the TD-20X to the original factory settings (Factory Reset). All data and settings stored in the TD-20X are lost in carrying out this operation. So if necessary, save your data to a CompactFlash card or an external MIDI device before executing the factory reset (p. 92, p. 119).

The VH OFFSET ADJUSTMENT screen appears.

fig.09-015-vh-offset2.eps_70

6. Loosen the clutch screw of the top hi-hat and let it

sit on the bottom hi-hat.
Do NOT touch the hi-hats or the pedal.

1. Press the [SETUP] button. 2. Press the [F5 (F RESET)] button.

The FACTORY RESET screen appears.
fig.09-012-freset.eps_70

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button.

The VH Offset parameter is set automatically.
fig.09-016-vh-offset3.eps_70

When finished, the DRUM KIT screen appears.

3. Press the [F5 (F RESET)] button.

The confirmation screen appears.
fig.09-013-freset-conf.eps_70

When Factory Reset is carried out, the GROUP FADERS settings values are set to the maximum volume, regardless of the slider positions.

To cancel, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

4. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute Factory

Reset.
When Factory Reset is finished, the following screen appears.
fig.09-014-vh-offset.eps_70

If you do not want to adjust the VH Offset parameter, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button. The offset adjustment is necessary in order to correctly detect open/close and pedal movements.

114

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

About MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard specification that allows musical data to be transferred between electronic musical instruments and computers. If a MIDI cable is connected between devices equipped with MIDI connectors, youll be able to play multiple devices from a single MIDI keyboard, perform ensembles using multiple MIDI instruments, program the settings to change automatically as the song progresses, and more.

MIDI Channel Settings [F1 (MIDI CH)]

For each part, you can specify the channel on which the TD-20X will receive and transmit MIDI messages.

1. Press the [SETUP] button.

The [SETUP] button lights, and the SETUP screen appears.

2. Press the [F1 (MIDI)] button.

About MIDI Connectors

The TD-20X is equipped with the following two types of MIDI connectors, each of which has the following role.

3. Press the [F1 (MIDI CH)] button.

The MIDI CHANNEL screen appears.
fig.10-001-midich.eps_70

MIDI IN Connector
This connector receives MIDI messages that are sent from an external MIDI device. When the TD-20X receives MIDI messages, it can respond by playing notes, switching sounds, etc.

4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

part you wish to set.

MIDI OUT/THRU connector

This connector transmits MIDI messages to an external MIDI device. Use it when you want to control an external MIDI device. If the Soft Through setting (p. 116) is turned ON, this connector will operate as a MIDI THRU connector. Messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be re-transmitted without change from this connector to an external MIDI device. Use this when you want multiple MIDI devices to receive the same stream of messages.

5. Use the [CURSOR (left/right)] buttons to select the

parameter.

6. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Value Description Turns the transmitting and receiving MIDI messages ON or OFF. Transmit and receive channel

Tx/Rx

OFF, ON

Channel

CH1CH16

Drum kit part and percussion part can be overlaid and set to CH10. When a duplicate note number is received, the instrument assigned to the drum kit part (the pad instrument) sounds. Other parts and MIDI channels cannot be overlaid.

7. Press the [EXIT] button twice to return to the

DRUM KIT screen.

115

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

MIDI Channel Settings for the Entire TD-20X [F2 (GLOBAL)]

1. Press the [SETUP] button.
The [SETUP] button lights, and the SETUP screen appears.

Playing an External MIDI Sound Module from Another MIDI Controller (Soft Through)
This section explains how you can use the Roland SPD-20 (a MIDI controller) together with the TD-20Xs pads to play internal sounds and an external sound module. When Soft Thru is set to ON, the messages received at MIDI IN will also be transmitted from the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.
fig.SoftThru.e

2. Press the [F1 (MIDI)] button. 3. Press the [F2 (GLOBAL)] button.
The MIDI GLOBAL screen appears.
fig.10-002-midi-global.eps_70

Pad or pedal

SPD-20

4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

MIDI OUT To the MIDI IN of another sound module or sampler TRIGGER INPUT MIDI OUT/THRU

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
Parameter Soft Thru Local Control Device ID V-LINK MIDI Ch V-LINK Device ID Value OFF, ON OFF, ON (DRUM), ON (PERC) 132 CH1CH16 Description Soft Through on/off

MIDI IN

Local Switch on/off (p. 117)

Device ID setting (p. 117)

TD-20X
V-LINK transmit channel (p. 118)

132, 128

V-LINK device ID (p. 118)

6. Press the [EXIT] button twice to return to the

DRUM KIT screen.

116

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

Recording the Pad Performance on an External Sequencer (Local Control)

This is required when you want to trigger sounds in an external sound module and/or record your performance on an external MIDI sequencer, and NOT use the TD-20Xs internal sounds. If that is your need, then turn Local Control to OFF. The trigger signals from the pads go directly to the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. The TD-20Xs default mode is with Local Control ON.
fig.LocalCtrl.e

Setting the Device ID

The setting described here is necessary only when you wish to transmit separate data to two or more TD-20X units at the same time. Do not change this setting in any other case. (At the factory settings, the device ID is set to 17.) If you lose track of the Device ID setting that was used when saving data via a bulk dump, it will no longer be possible to reload the bulk data that was saved. Example: Suppose that when data was saved via bulk dump (p. 119), the TD-20Xs Device ID was set to 17. When re-transmitting this data back to the TD-20X, it wont receive if the Device ID is set to something other than 17.
fig.DeviceID.e

Pad
Trigger Input

TD-20X

Transmit data Device ID: 17

Trigger MIDI Converter Local Control: OFF

OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

IN

OUT Internal Sound Generator

IN

Device ID: 17

MIDI IN
External MIDI Sequencer (Soft Thru: ON) If you make connections and record as shown, with a setting of Local Control ON, duplicate notes will be retransmitted to the TD-20X and will not be played correctly. ON (DRUM): The performance data from the pad is sent to the drum kit part. Normally set to this. ON (PERC): The performance data from the pad is sent to the percussion part and drum kits cannot be played. Select this only when you record the percussion part with pads. When Local Control is set to ON (PERC), the sound does not change if you switch drum kits because drum kits cannot be played with pads.

System Exclusive is not received

Device ID: 16

117

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

5. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

MIDI Settings for V-LINK

V-LINK MIDI Ch (V-LINK MIDI Channel)
When V-LINK function (p. 123) is on, the performance data recorded in the backing part of the sequencer is transmitted on this channel. At the factory settings, this is set to CH16.

settings.
Parameter Value Description Control change used for transmitting/receiving the depth to which the hi-hat pedal pressed Control change used for transmitting/receiving the strike position of the snare, ride, and tom 14 The only time you would need to change this setting is when you are triggering an external sound module. The note number transmitted when you strike the hi-hat will change depending on the amount of pressure on the hi-hat pedal. Hi-Hat Note Number Border allows you to adjust the pedal position at which the note number switches from the open hi-hat to the closed hi-hat. At the factory default value (127), the closed hi-hat note number will be transmitted only if the hi-hat pad is played with the pedal completely depressed. If you want this note number to be transmitted when the pedal is slightly raised, set this to a value such as 90.

Pedal CC

Snare CC Ride CC

OFF, MODULATION(1), BREATH(2), FOOT(4), EXPRESSION(11), GENERAL1(16) GENERAL4(19)

V-LINK Device ID
Set this ID to match the device ID number of the device which is controlled by the TD-20X. If this is set to 128, you can control the device regardless of the device ID number of it. At the factory settings, this is set to 128.

Toms CC

MIDI Message Settings for Detailed Performance Expression [F3 (CTRL)]

1. Press the [SETUP] button.
The [SETUP] button lights, and the SETUP screen appears.

HH Note# Border

0127

2. Press the [F1 (MIDI)] button. 3. Press the [F3 (CTRL)] button.
The MIDI CONTROL screen appears.
fig.10-003-midi-ctrl.eps_70

If you change the hi-hat note number border setting, the actual hi-hat performance may not match the playback of the recorded pattern.

4. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the

parameter.

When a control change is set to be more than one parameter, an asterisk (*) appears at the right of the unavailable parameter.

6. Press the [EXIT] button twice to return to the

DRUM KIT screen.

118

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

Specifying the Drum Kits Recalled by Program Changes [F4 (PROG)]

Each drum kit/percussion set has its own program change number.

Saving Data to an External MIDI Device (Bulk Dump) [F5 (BULK)]

Saving data
To save data, use the external sequencer as you would when recording musical data, and perform the following steps on the TD-20X as shown in the following diagram.

1. Press the [SETUP] button.

The [SETUP] button lights, and the SETUP screen appears.

1. Connect the TD-20Xs MIDI OUT connector with a 2. Press the [F1 (MIDI)] button. 3. Press the [F4 (PROG)] button.
The MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE (DRUM KIT) or MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE (PERC SET) screen appears.
fig.10-004-pc-kit.eps_70

MIDI cable to the MIDI IN connector of the external sequencer.

fig.BulkDump.e

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

fig.10-005-pc-perc.eps_70

Sequencer

TD-20X

2. Press the [SETUP] button.

Function button [F1 (RX ON)] [F2 (TX ON)] [F3 (DRM KIT)] Turns program change reception on/off. Turns program change transmission on/off. Specifies the program change for each drum kit. Specifies the program change for each percussion set.

The [SETUP] button lights, and the SETUP screen appears.

3. Press the [F1 (MIDI)] button. 4. Press the [F5 (BULK)] button.
The MIDI BULK DUMP screen appears.
fig.10-006-bulk.eps_70

[F4 (PRC SET)]

4. Press the [F3] or [F4] button to select the function. 5. Use the [CURSOR (up/down)] buttons to select the
drum kit or percussion set you wish to set.

6. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to make

settings.
The drum kits/percussion sets will switch when a Program Change message is received from an external MIDI device. When you switch TD-20Xs drum kits/percussion sets, the Program Change number set here is transmitted.

119

Chapter 10. MIDI Settings

5. Use the [VALUE] dial, the [-] [+], and [CURSOR (up/
down)] buttons to select the content to be sent.
Transmit Data ALL SETUP ALL DRUM KITS 1 DRUM KIT ALL TRIG BANKS 1 TRIG BANK ALL PERC GROUPS 1 PERC GROUP ALL PATTERNS Description All data, including setup, drum kits, user percussion sets, user patterns Trigger, pad, and other kinds of settings All data for drum kits 1100 Only the data for the selected drum kit All settings for trigger banks 14 Only the settings for the selected trigger bank All data for the user percussion sets 18 Only the data for the selected percussion set All data for the user patterns 151250

Loading data to the TD-20X

At this time, all the TD-20Xs current data is overwritten. Make sure you have made the needed backup.

1. Connect the TD-20Xs MIDI IN connector with a

MIDI cable to the MIDI OUT connector of the external sequencer.
fig.BulkLoad.e

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

6. Start the recording process of the external

sequencer.

Sequencer

TD-20X

7. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to begin sending

the data.
If you want to stop sending, press the [F1 (STOP)] button.
fig.10-007-bulk55.eps_70

2. Get your external sequencer to start sending the

settings data that was previously bulk dumped to it.
Received data is written into the TD-20X.

8. When finished, the following screen appears.

fig.10-008-bulk-comp.eps_70

9. Press [EXIT)] button to return to the previous

screen.
Bulk Dump is one kind of System Exclusive message. Be sure to use an external MIDI sequencer that is capable of recording System Exclusive messages. In addition, confirm that the sequencer is not set to Do not receive System Exclusive messages.

120

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS]

Press the [TOOLS] button to see various parameters or use functions such as Kit Selection or V- LINK

1. Press the [TOOLS] button.

The [TOOLS] button lights, and the TOOLS A screen appears.
fig.11-001-tools-a.eps_70

Playing a Kit from the CompactFlash without Loading It (Kit Selection) [F1 (KIT SEL)]
A TD-20 or TDW-20 preset drum kit or any kit saved on a CompactFlash card can be played without loading it. This function is called Kit Selection. Its an easy way to audition kits before loading them into the internal memory.

fig.11-002-tools-b.eps_70

If desired, you can also copy the drum kit from the card to a drum kit in user memory. In this mode kits can not be edited and the Pad Pattern function (p. 52) will not work. If you want to use a drum kit from a CompactFlash card, insert the card into the TD-20X before you continue.

Function button (TOOLS A screen) Allows you to play a drum kit saved on a CompactFlash card without loading the kit. (Kit Selection) Displays the output volume of each jack (p. 122). Displays the trigger data of each pad (p. 123). Allows you to control images from the TD-20X (p. 123). (V-LINK) Switches between the TOOLS A screen and TOOLS B screen.

[F1 (KIT SEL)]

1. In the TOOLS A screen, press the [F1 (KIT SEL)]

button.
The KIT SELECTION screen will appear.
fig.11-003-kit-sel.eps_70

[F2 (OUT MON)] [F3 (TRG MON)] [F4 (V-LINK)]

[F5 (A<>B)]

Function button Function button (TOOLS B screen) [F1 (TDW-20)] [F1 (INFO)] Displays the usage status of the TD-20Xs memory and of the CompactFlash card, and displays the version of the TD-20Xs operating program (p. 125). Switches between the TOOLS A screen and TOOLS B screen. [F2 (TD-20)] [F3 (CARD)] TDW-20 preset drum kits TD-20 preset drum kits Drum kit from a backup saved on the CompactFlash card

[F5 (A<>B)]

2. Use the [F1][F3] buttons to select the location of

the desired drum kit.

2. In the TOOLS A or TOOLS B screen, press the

[EXIT] or [KIT] button to return to the DRUM KIT screen.

121

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS]

3. Use the function buttons, [CURSOR], [-] [+] buttons,

and [VALUE] dial to select the desired drum kit.
Function button [F1 (LIST)] [F5 (COPY)] Displays a list of drum kits. Copies the selected drum kit to a drum kit in user memory.

4. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button.

A confirmation message will appear.
fig.11-005-prekit-copy-conf.eps_70

If you selected [F3 (CARD)] in step 2 [F2 (BANK -)] [F3 (BANK +)] Selects the next-numbered backup. Selects the previous-numbered backup.

If you decide to cancel the copy or exchange, press the [F1 (CANCEL)] button.

5. Press the [F5 (EXECUTE)] button to execute.

When copying has been completed, Kit Selection will be cancelled, and the DRUM KIT screen will appear with the copied drum kit selected.

By holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [KIT] button, you can access a screen where the CompactFlash card is selected as the drum kit selection location.

4. Play the drum kit.

Now you can play the drum kit that shows in the screen. This function is cancelled if you exit the KIT SELECTION screen.

Viewing the Output Level (OUPUT MONITOR) [F2 (OUT MON)]

You can view the volume that is being output from the MASTER OUT, PHONES, or DIRECT OUT jacks.

Copying the Drum Kit Chosen in Kit Selection

1. Select a drum kit as described in steps 13 of
Playing a Kit from the CompactFlash without Loading It (Kit Selection) [F1 (KIT SEL)] (p. 121).
fig.11-004-prekit-copy.eps_70

1. In the TOOLS A screen (p. 121), press the [F2 (OUT

MON)] button.
The OUTPUT MONITOR screen appears.
fig.11-006-mon.eps_70

2. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the [VALUE] dial to select

the output.

2. Press the [F5 (COPY)] button. 3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or [VALUE] dial to select the
copy-destination drum kit.

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TOOLS A

screen.
You can also access the OUTPUT MONITOR screen by pressing the [KIT] button and then pressing the [F2 (FUNC)] button (p. 41).

122

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS]

Viewing Trigger Information for Each Pad [F3 (TRG MON)]

You can view realtime information that shows the force (velocity) with which each pad is struck, how far the hi-hat is open, and the strike position on the snare, ride cymbal, toms, and AUX. Performance data received from the drum part of the pattern thats playing and performance data received from the MIDI IN connector is also shown.

Using the TD-20X to Control Images [F5 (V-LINK)]

What is V-LINK?
V-LINK ( ) is a function that allows music and images to be performed together. By using MIDI to connect two or more V-LINK compatible devices, you can easily enjoy performing a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance.

1. In the TOOLS A screen (p. 121), press the [F3 (TRG

MON)] button.
The TRIGGER MONITOR screen appears.
fig.11-007-trig.eps_70

Using V-LINK
Turning V-LINK on/off
1. Press the [TOOLS] button.

2. Strike the pads.

The meter indications in the screen will move in realtime, allowing you to view the following information.
Indication VELOCITY Description Shows the force of the strike on each pad. Shows how far the hi-hat is open. The indicator will move toward OPEN as the hi-hat opens, and toward PRESS as it closes. Indicates the rim strike position on the snare, ride cymbal, toms, and AUX. The indicator will move toward CENTER as the strike is closer to the center of the pad, and toward OUTER as the strike is closer to the edge of the pad. Indicates the time interval at which the pad is struck. The indicator will move toward the right to indicate a shorter time interval. The cymbal or snare roll sound will change smoothly depending on the interval between repeated strikes. The CHOKE icon appears when the cymbal is choked.

The [TOOLS] button lights, and the TOOLS A screen appears.

2. Press the [F4 (V-LINK)] button to turn the V-LINK

function ON and OFF.
fig.11-008-vlink.eps_70

HI-HAT

3. Press the [KIT] or [EXIT] button to display the

DRUM KIT screen.
When V-LINK is on, the V-LINK icon appears in the DRUM KIT screen.
fig.11-009-vlink-kit.eps_70

POSITION

INTERVAL

CHOKE

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TOOLS A

screen.

The V-LINK function will always be OFF when you turn the TD-20Xs power on.

123

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS]

V-LINK functions that the TD-20X can Control and MIDI messages
When playing a pattern by hitting a pad (Pad Pattern; p. 52), you can assign the following functions to the note messages recorded in the backing parts of the pattern to control the VLINK-compatible video equipment. The backing parts are the parts other than the drum part and percussion part of the internal sequencer. Set Play Type (p. 78) of the pattern to VLINK. The Performance data recorded in the backing part of the sequencer is transmitted on V-LINK MIDI Ch (p. 118). Set V-LINK Device ID (p. 118) to match the device ID number of the video equipment which is controlled by the TD-20X (p. 118).
Transmitted MIDI messages Selecting a palette Selecting a clip Changing the time of the transition between clips Note On (*1) Note On (*2) Note On (*2) (Velocity)

*1 Palette No. Palette 1 Palette 2 Palette 3 Palette 4 Palette 5 Palette 6 Palette 7 Palette 8 Palette 9 Palette 10 Palette 11 Palette 12 Note No. 37 (C#2) 39 (D#2) 42 (F#2) 44 (G#2) 46 (A#2) 49 (C#3) 51 (D#3) 54 (F#3) 56 (G#3) 58 (A#3) 61 (C#4) 63 (D#4) 66 (F#4) 68 (G#4) 70 (A#4) 73 (C#5) 75 (D#5) 78 (F#5) 80 (G#5) 82 (A#5)

*2 Clip No. Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 Clip 5 Clip 6 Clip 7 Clip 8 Clip 9 Clip 10 Clip 11 Clip 12 Clip 13 Clip 14 Clip 15 Clip 16 Clip 17 Clip 18 Clip 19 Clip 20 Clip 21 Clip 22 Clip 23 Clip 24 Clip 25 Clip 26 Clip 27 Clip 28 Note No. 36 (C2) 38 (D2) 40 (E2) 41 (F2) 43 (G2) 45 (A2) 47 (B2) 48 (C3) 50 (D3) 52 (E3) 53 (F3) 55 (G3) 57 (A3) 59 (B3) 60 (C4) 62 (D4) 64 (E4) 65 (F4) 67 (G4) 69 (A4) 71 (B4) 72 (C5) 74 (D5) 76 (E5) 77 (F5) 79 (G5) 81 (A5) 83 (B5)

V-LINK function Palette 120 Clip 128 Dissolve Time

Palette 13 Palette 14 Palette 15 Palette 16 Palette 17 Palette 18 Palette 19 Palette 20

Refer to the owners manual that came with the equipment youre connecting for details concerning clips, pallets, dissolve times, etc.

124

Chapter 11. Other Functions [TOOLS]

Viewing the Remaining Memory and the Program Version [F1 (INFO)]
1. In the TOOLS B screen (p. 121), press the [F1
(INFO)] button.

2. Use the [F1], [F2], or [F5] button to display the

status you want to see.
[F1 (MEMORY)] button: Information of the internal memory
fig.11-009-info-ptn.eps_70

[F2 (CARD)] button: CompactFlash card information

fig.11-010-info-cf.eps_70

[F5 (VERSION)] button: TD-20Xs internal program version

fig.11-012-info-version.eps_70

3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the TOOLS B

screen.

125

Messages and Error Messages

This section lists the messages (error messages) that the TD-20X produces and explains the meaning of each message, giving you the appropriate action to take.
fig.99-001-error-accept.eps_70

When an indication of ACCEPT is shown above the [F5] button as in the figure, pressing that button will close the message window.

Error Messages
Message Backup Battery Low! Meaning The internal backup battery of the TD-20X (a battery that maintains data in the user memory) has run down. Data in the TD-20Xs memory may be corrupted. The TD20Xs internal backup battery (the battery used for saving User memory data) is fully drained; internal data has been lost. It is possible that the power has been turned off for the MIDI device connected to the TD-20Xs MIDI IN connector. A problem has occurred with the internal system. The maximum number of measures that can be recorded to one pattern has been exceeded; no further recording or editing that adds measures can be carried out. The maximum number of steps that can be recorded to one chain has been exceeded; no further editing that adds steps can be carried out. Pattern contained an excessive amount of data, and as a result could not be output successfully from MIDI OUT. Pattern recording or editing could not be carried out because there was not enough internal memory. No card is in the CompactFlash card slot. There are no empty space on the CompactFlash card. No data you request on the CompactFlash card. A card the size of which is not supported by TD-20X has been inserted. A card the format of which is not supported by TD-20X has been inserted. The data stored on the card has been corrupted. The checksum value of a system exclusive message was incorrect. The receive address of a system exclusive message was incorrect. Action Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center to have the battery replaced. Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center to have the battery replaced. Follow the messages appearing on the screen to carry out Factory Reset (p. 114); you will then be able to use the unit temporarily. Check the power of the connected MIDI device. Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center. Delete unneeded measures from the pattern being recorded or edited (p. 88).

System Initialize

MIDI Communication Error! System Error!

Measure Maximum!

Step Maximum!

Delete unneeded steps from the chain being edited (p. 43).

Data Overload!

Try eliminating a part that has too much data.

Not Enough Memory! No Card! No Space! No Data! Unsupported!

Try deleting patterns that are no longer needed (p. 88). Insert a CompactFlash card. Delete unneeded data (p. 94). Cards supported by TD-20X are 3.3 V CompactFlash cards with the capacity of 16 MB to 4 GB. Check the card. Format the card (p. 94). Format the card (p. 94). Correct the checksum value.

Unformatted! Card Damaged! BULK DUMP Checksum Error! BULK DUMP Receive Address Error! BULK DUMP Receive Data Error! BULK DUMP Receive Time Out!

Correct the receive address. If the same error message is displayed repeatedly, there is a problem with the MIDI messages that are being transmitted to the TD-20X. Make the interval of the data shorter.

A MIDI message was received incorrectly.

The interval in receiving system exclusive messages were too long.

126

Messages and Error Messages

Messages
Message BULK DUMP Receiving... Please Wait. BULK DUMP Aborted! Preset Pattern! Empty Pattern! No Empty Pattern! MIDI Offline! Meaning Bulk data is now being received. Action

Bulk data transmission was halted. You cannot record on the preset pattern. This pattern contains no performance data; it cannot be edited. There are no empty patterns for recording. A MIDI cable was disconnected. (Or communication with the external MIDI device stopped for some reason.) A large amount of MIDI messages were received in a short time, and could not be processed completely. There are no empty backup area on the CompactFlash card. There are no empty backup pattern on the CompactFlash card.

Copy the pattern onto a user pattern. Select the other pattern that contains performance data. Delete unneeded pattern (p. 88). Make sure that MIDI cables have not been pulled out or broken. Confirm that the external MIDI device is properly connected. If the problem persists, reduce the amount of MIDI messages sent to the TD-20X. Delete unneeded backup (p. 94). Delete unneeded backup pattern (p. 90).

MIDI Buffer Full!

No Empty Backup! No Empty Backup Pattern! Power On Too Long. Please Turn Off! Auto Shutdown Completed. Please Turn Off!

The power remains ON for a long time.

Turn the TD-20Xs power off, then turn on again.

127

Preset Drum Kit List

Preset Drum Kit List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Kit Name TD-20X 50s King CtrlRoom Metal Core FunkGroove 40s Bop process Cajon melodious Premium SwingJazz BluesRock DryStudio 2HH House TechFusion LetitBeat neotype jazzbop RawBeat Vintage Rock D-N-B GarageRock 80s Funk Cashmirror BREAKs 90s Rock jazzclub Jive AmbRock cosmic crossover Vintage Jazz Coolth U-Blue FunkyJungle natural LOOP LOOP 1SHOT, TAP TAP Pad Ptn Description Allows you to explore the expressive capabilities of the V-Drums. This kit features dry and vintage sounds. A dry, recording studio type sounding kit. Perfect for heavy metal music. Funk kit with an open-sounding snare. This kit features an 18 jazz kick. Heavily processed! This kits features sounds from all over the world. There are melodies everywhere! Great sounding rock kit. Swing jazz kit with a bright sound. Blues rock kit with a loose feel. Dry studio sound kit with no ambience. This kit has a 2nd hi-hat on the 2nd tom. Fusion kit with short, bright ambience. A dry and lo-fi kit, with a tambourine layered on the hi-hat. Tap patterns are assigned to the cymbal edges. Jazz live kit with room sound. Distorted kit featuring the lo-fi multi effect. Vintage rock kit with a large-diameter kick drum. Pattern is assigned to crash 2, and toms 1 & 2 feature a dynamically controlled, filtered sound. A vintage 70s sound. Tight and bright funk kit. Features a phaser effect. perfect for break beats & hip hop. Rock kit with a bright ambience and rock toms. Featuring one of the new ambiences-jazz club. Jive/jazz/pop kit with an 8-inch tom and tight snare. Features a combination of reverb and ambience. A very non-acoustic sounding kit. Crossover sound of the 70s created with compression and gating. Jazz kit marked by a distinctive ride sizzle and open kick/toms. A very tight and compressed kit. A lot of ambience is used on this kit. Various patterns are assigned to the crash cymbals. Tight, dry and natural sounding kit.

128

Preset Drum Kit List

No. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

Kit Name LA BeBop MBsHouse Bronze DarkComper Drums&DJ GATED RotoFXCity PopDelay 1985 Dizzy BrazilPerc LatinDrums AsianV FLANGER VPro Slamin METAL JazzCombo OverDrive Titanium RotoKit UNIVERSE Skanky Brushes Spark GT Antique BreakBeats Studio Groover Mallet Drumline JazzGig Airtime Sploink Boogaloo Zeppy Arena Maple

Pad Ptn

Description Typical drum kit for bebop. Perfect for house and trance music. Kit with compressor and ambience adjusted for tight sound. Heavily compressed kit. A very hybrid kit. This features the new gate ambience. The hi hat functions as a pitch bender for the toms. This uses the sync delay effect. Test it with different tempo settings. 1980s electronic sound. Kit with a distinctive flanger. Kit containing a collection of Brazilian percussion. Features the new laying function on the hi-hat and snare rim. Features Asian percussion.

1SHOT, TAP

Tap patterns on crash 1 & 2 and flanged patterns on the tom rims. Standard drum sound of the original TD-20.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Slash metal kit created with suitable EQ, compressor, and ambience. Playing the kick strongly will appropriately mute the open sound.

TAP

Bass is played on the Kick. Kit containing a snare with a distinctive ring.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Kit that uses ambience to thicken the sound. Loose-sounding kit with a raw-feeling decay. You can play this kit with brushes. Sharp, bright sounding kit. Dry-sounding vintage-feel kit. Warm vintage-feel kit. Lo-Fi sound kit used in breakbeats. Kit in the drum booth of a recording studio.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Drum set played with mallets. Drumline of a marching band.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Kit processed by ambience for a thick sound. Bright-sounding kit. Kit with unadjusted drums. Kit including the reflections of a concert hall. Kit including the reverberation heard in an arena. Kit using a maple snare.

129

Preset Drum Kit List

No. 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Kit Name Shallow Ballad Raspy PopReggae BrassBiggie WetBooth 70s Record Lite Mellow Stadium TiteOctas 90s Power FxJungle Tekno TR-808 TR-909 HexDrum Cosmosis Technology OrchPerc Survivor Latin Toys African Perc Tabla/Sitar UserKit

Pad Ptn

Description Kit with shallow-bodied toms.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Dry-sounding kit for jazz.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Kit with a brass snare.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Simulates the recording techniques popular in the 70s. Light and bright-sounding kit. Mellow and warm-sounding kit. Kit including the reverberation of a stadium. Kit with a collection of small melodic toms. Power kit that was popular in the rhythm machines of the 90s.

TAP

Chords are played on Crash 2s edge. Techno sound produced by electronic sounds.

LOOP

Kit from the TR-808 rhythm machine. Kit from the TR-909 rhythm machine.

LOOP

Loop pattern is played on Clash 2s bow. Kit created from electronic sounds and processed sounds. Kit created from electronic toms and flanger.

TAP

Chords are played on the Crash 2s bow & edge. Effect sounds that take advantage of ambience. A collection of Latin percussion. A collection of African percussion.

TAP

Sitar can be played on Crash2s bow. Settings such as pan and volume are set to their default values. Use this when youre creating a kit from scratch.

About the Pad Patterns

LOOP: Loop Pattern: TAP: Tap Pattern: Playback starts when the pad to which the pattern is assigned is struck, and stops when hit again. Chords or melodies are played once each time the pad to which the pattern is assigned is struck.

1SHOT: One-Shot Pattern: Playback (one time only) starts when the pad to which the pattern is assigned is struck.

130

Drum Instrument List

KICK
No. Name

KICK ELEC
No. Name

SNARE PROCESSED
No. Name Remark

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

22Birch K 22Solid K 22StdMple K 22Maple K 24Carbon K 22CbnMple K 22GT K 22TitanHp K 22Mahogny K 20Lite K 22RoseWd K 22Oak K Recording1 K Recording2 K Universal K BigOpen K JazzCombo1 K JazzCombo2 K Cannon K Roto K Booth K Ballad K Swing K Heavy K Can K Fusion K Latin K Meat K Pillow K DryMed K Dry K Solid K Reso K Raw K Vintage K OldMple K Hard K BigLow K Hybrid K Gabba1 K Gabba2 K Gabba3 K

58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

Cosmic K Hi-Q K Analog1 K Analog2 K Analog3 K ClascElec1 K ClascElec2 K ClascElec3 K ClascElec4 K ClascElec5 K ClascElec6 K TR808 Kick TR909 Kick

SNARE
No. Name Remark

KICK PROCESSED
No. Name

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

Cartoon K Chicken K Jive K RB K Layered K Lazy K HardLow K Alley K DaFloor K Croak K Plastic K Trip K Gokigen K FX-Wah K Lo-Fi K

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

RoundBdge S RoundBdge SR CoolyMple S CoolyMple SR 70sMetal S 70sMetal SR WoodBrass S WoodBrass SR 13Hole S 13Hole SR Aluminum S Aluminum SR Titanium S Titanium SR Skanky S Skanky SR 30sMaple S 30sMaple SR BrassPico S BrassPico SR Booth S Booth SR Studio S Studio SR Ballad S Ballad SR Swing S Swing SR Street S Lite S LA Fat S Ring S Whack S Impulse S Cruddy1 S Cruddy2 S HotRod S HotRod SR

*P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P

*I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X

113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141

Basis S Chunk S ClapTailS ClubDry S Dump S HopRim1 S HopRim2 S HopRim3 S LzrGate S Pick S Planet S RB S 2Step S Lo-Fi S Round XStik Cooly XStik 70s XStik WoodBr XStik 13 XStik Alumi XStik Titan XStik Skanky XStik 30s XStik Reggae XStik Ballad XStik Studio XStik Swing XStik Hard XStik Maple XStik

*X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X

SNARE ELEC
No. Name Remark

142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150

ClascElec1 S ClascElec2 S ClascElec3 S ClascElec4 S ClascElec5 S TR808 Snare TR808 SnrRim TR909 Snare TR909 SnrRim

*X *X *X *X *X *X *X

*P *P *P

*I *I *I *I *I *I *I *I *I *I *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X

SNARE BRUSH
No. Name Remark

109 110 111 112

Brush1 Brush1 Brush2 Brush2

S SR S SR

*BRUSH *X *BRUSH *X

131

Drum Instrument List

TOM
No. Name Remark

No.

Name

Remark

151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222

12Birch T1 12Birch T1R 13Birch T2 13Birch T2R 16Birch T3 16Birch T3R 18Birch T4 18Birch T4R 12GT T1 12GT T1R 13GT T2 13GT T2R 16GT T3 16GT T3R 18GT T4 18GT T4R 10Univ T1 10Univ T1R 12Univ T2 12Univ T2R 14Univ T3 14Univ T3R 16Univ T4 16Univ T4R 12Clasc T1 12Clasc T1R 13Clasc T2 13Clasc T2R 16Clasc T3 16Clasc T3R 18Clasc T4 18Clasc T4R 12Fiber T1 12Fiber T1R 14Fiber T2 14Fiber T2R 16Fiber T3 16Fiber T3R 18Fiber T4 18Fiber T4R 12Maple T1 12Maple T1R 14Maple T2 14Maple T2R 16Maple T3 16Maple T3R 18Maple T4 18Maple T4R 12Oak T1 12Oak T1R 14Oak T2 14Oak T2R 16Oak T3 16Oak T3R 18Oak T4 18Oak T4R 8Roto T1 8Roto T1R 10Roto T2 10Roto T2R 12Roto T3 12Roto T3R 14Roto T4 14Roto T4R 16Roto T5 16Roto T6 18Roto T7 18Roto T8 18RotoExLo1 18RotoExLo2 Ballad T1 Ballad T2

*P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P

223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268

Ballad T3 Ballad T4 Swing T1 Swing T2 Swing T3 Swing T4 Pop1 T1 Pop1 T2 Pop1 T3 Pop1 T4 Pop2 T1 Pop2 T2 Pop2 T3 Pop2 T4 Round T1 Round T2 Round T3 Round T4 80sDry T1 80sDry T2 80sDry T3 80sDry T4 90sBig T1 90sBig T2 90sBig T3 90sBig T4 90sPower T1 90sPower T2 90sPower T3 90sPower T4 OctaTom C Hi OctaTom B OctaTom A OctaTom G OctaTom F OctaTom E OctaTom D OctaTom C Mallet T1 Mallet T2 Mallet T3 Mallet T4 Brush T1 Brush T2 Brush T3 Brush T4

HI-HAT
No. Name

293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310

14P-HatHH 14P-HatHHEg 13Hatz HH 13Hatz HHEg 14Hatz HH 14Hatz HHEg 14Dark HH 14Dark HHEg 14Edge HH 14Edge HHEg TriangleHH HandCym HH Brush HH CR78 HH TR808 HH TR909 HH Tekno HH Elec HH

CRASH
No. Name Remark

311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330

16DarK CrBw 16DarK CrEg 16Thin CrBw 16Thin CrEg 16PaperCrBw 16PaperCrEg 16FsPwrCrBw 16FsPwrCrEg 18PowerCrBw 18PowerCrEg 18Med CrBw 18Med CrEg 19NY CrBw 19NY CrEg 18Fast CrBw 18Fast CrEg 18Fast CrBl Brush Cr Brush CrEg Mallet Cr

*I *I *I *I *I *I *I *I

*I *I

SPLASH
No. Name

TOM ELEC
No. Name

269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292

ClscElec1 T1 ClscElec1 T2 ClscElec1 T3 ClscElec1 T4 ClscElec2 T1 ClscElec2 T2 ClscElec2 T3 ClscElec2 T4 ClscElec3 T1 ClscElec3 T2 ClscElec3 T3 ClscElec3 T4 ClscElec4 T1 ClscElec4 T2 ClscElec4 T3 ClscElec4 T4 TR808 T1 TR808 T2 TR808 T3 TR808 T4 TR909 T1 TR909 T2 TR909 T3 TR909 T4

331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340

6SplazhSpBw 6SplazhSpEg 8Thin SpBw 8Thin SpEg 8Bell SpBw 8Bell SpEg 8Open SpBw 8Open SpEg 10Med SpBw 10Med SpEg

CHINA
No. Name Remark

341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349

12PgyBack 12PgyBackEg 16Swish 16Swish Eg 18CB Low 18CB Low Eg 20U-China China PgBack Crash PgBack

*I *I *I *I *I *I

132

Drum Instrument List

RIDE
No. Name Remark

No.

Name

350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383

18PRideRd 18PRideRdBl 18PRideRdEg 18Bop Rd 18Bop RdBl 18Bop RdEg 20HeavyRd 20HeavyRdBl 20HeavyRdEg 20Med Rd 20Med RdBl 20Med RdEg 20TurkyRd 20TurkyRdBl 20TurkyRdEg 19NY Rd 19NY RdBl 19NY RdEg 20Lite Rd 20Lite RdBl 20Lite RdEg 22CleanRd 22CleanRdBl 22CleanRdEg 18FormuRd 18FormuRdBl 18FormuRdEg 20Bell Rd 20Bell RdBl 20Bell RdEg Brush Rd Brush RdEg Mallet1 Rd Mallet2 Rd

*P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I

*I *I

PERCUSSION
No. Name

384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417

Bongo Hi Bongo HiSlap Bongo Lo Bongo LoSlap Conga Hi Conga HiMute Conga HiSlap Conga Lo Conga LoMute Cajon Bass Cajon Mute Cajon Slap Cowbell Hi Cowbell Lo Cowbell Mute CowbellMambo Claves SquareBlock Block Hi Block Lo Maracas Caxixi Shaker Tambourine1 Tambourine2 Tambourine3 Guiro Long Guiro Short Timbale Hi Timbale HiRm Timbale Lo TimbalePaila Agogo Hi Agogo Lo

418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478

Cabasa Cuica Hi Cuica Lo Cuica Acc Pandeiro PandeiroMute PandeiroSlap Surdo Hi Surdo HiMute Surdo Lo Surdo LoMute Whistle WhistleShort VibraSlap Tabla Na Tabla Te Tabla Ti Tabla Tin Tabla Tun Baya Ge Baya Gin Baya Ka Baya Slide PotDrum PotDrum Acc PotDrum Mute Djembe Tone Djembe Slap Djembe Bass TalkingDr TalkingDr Up Castanet WoodBlock Timpani C Timpani G ConcertBD ConcertBD Mt HandCymbal HandCymbalMt Triangle TriangleCls Triangle2 Triangle2Cls Crotale BellTree SleighBell TreeChimes ThaiGong TinyGong Gong OrchestraHit SnareRoll ConcertSnare SteelDrum Celesta Glockenspiel Kalimba Marimba TubularBell Vibraphone Xylophone

PERC ANALOG
No. Name

479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489

CR78Cowbell CR78Guiro CR78Maracas CR78MtlBeat CR78Tamb TR808Clap TR808Claves TR808Cowbell TR808Maracas TR808XStick TR909Clap

SFX
No. Name

490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512

Hi-Q Poa Pyon Picoon Byon Kyun Psyun Boom SuperLow TimeWarp1 TimeWarp2 Transform1 Transform2 Transform3 Tekno FX1 Tekno FX2 Tekno FX3 Ring FX Drop Out LaserGun Spiral Emergency Wonderer

133

Drum Instrument List

OTHER
No. Name

EXP KICK PROCESSED

No. Name

No.

Name

Remark

513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561

Click Beep Sticks Sticks2 MetroBell MetroClick FingerSnaps Clap R8Slap Motor Engine Glass Burt Boing1 Boing2 Bounce VerbyHit AfroStomp Bomb! TuningTom ReverseCrash ReverseChina PhaseCrash PhaseRide Scratch1 Scratch2 Scratch3 Scratch4 TapeStop TapeRewind Voice OK Voice Yeah Vocoder1 Vocoder2 TeknoHit PhillyHit FunkHit Bass Gliss Guitar Gliss GuitarScrtch CutGt Down CutGt Up WahGt1 Down WahGt1 Up WahGt2 Down WahGt2 Up Sine 440Hz For PadCheck Off

582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600

Tight1 K Tight2 K Tight3 K Tight4 K Tight5 K Tight6 K Solid1 K Solid2 K Solid3 K Wild K Mondo K Reverb K Distorted K BreakBeats K Woofer K FX Stomp K FX Chest K FX Handle K FX Door K

646 647 648 649 650

50sKingMt SR WhiteAsh S WhiteAsh SR Popcorn S Popcorn SR

*X *I *X *I *X

EXP SNARE PROCESSED

No. Name Remark

EXP KICK ELEC

No. Name

601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620

ClscElec7 K ClscElec8 K ClscElec9 K 808Attack K 808Low K 909Power K 909Low K AnalogQ1 K AnalogQ2 K AnalogQ3 K Synthy K Filter1 K Filter2 K Filter3 K Filter4 K Jungle K FX Elec1 K FX Elec2 K FX Elec3 K FX Elec4 K

651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680

PrcsWood S PrcsWood SR PrcsMetal S PrcsMetal SR PrcsElec1 S PrcsElec1 SR PrcsElec2 S PrcsElec2 SR PrcsXStik S PrcsNoise S DynaFilter S ClscFat1 S ClscFat1 SR ClscFat2 S ClscFat2 SR SoundFX1 S SoundFX2 S SoundFX3 S SoundFX4 S SoundFX5 S Distorted1 S Distorted2 S Wood XStik Steel XStik Brass XStik 80sMtl XStik 50sKingXStik WhtAsh XStik Light XStik Lo-Fi XStik

*X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X *X

EXP SNARE ELEC

No. Name

EXP SNARE
No. Name Remark

EXP KICK
No. Name

562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581

22BirchLo K 22BirchHi K 23D-Maple K 22NCMaple K 22LwgVntg K 22RokVntg K 22PKMaple K 22SnrVntg K 24VLite K 22Premium K 22BirchWetK 22GT Vntg K 22LooseHd K 20TightHd K 20GT Open K 20BigBand K 18Combo K 18BeBopLo K 18BeBopHi K Ambience K

621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645

CustomWoodS CustomWoodSR 80s Metal S 80s Metal SR Bronze S Bronze SR CraftStl S CraftStl SR OpenBrass S OpenBrass SR 50s King S 50s King SR GT Maple S GT Maple SR Piccolo S Piccolo SR 12Cmpact S 12Cmpact SR 10Cmpact S 10Cmpact SR Skanky2 S Skanky2 SR StlPhonic S StlPhonic SR 50sKingMt S

*P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P

*I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X *I *X

681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690

ClscElec6 S ClscElec7 S ClscElec8 S ClscElec9 S 808Power S 808Power SR 909Power S 909Power SR 909Dist S 909Reverb S

*P *P *P *P

*I *X *I *X *I

134

Drum Instrument List

EXP TOM
No. Name Remark

EXP HI-HAT
No. Name

EXP RIDE
No. Name Remark

691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740

8NCMpl T1 8NCMpl T1R 10NCMpl T2 10NCMpl T2R 12NCMpl T3 12NCMpl T3R 14NCMpl T4 14NCMpl T4R 16NCMpl T5 16NCMpl T5R 8PKJaz T1 8PKJaz T1R 10PKJaz T2 10PKJaz T2R 12PKJaz T3 12PKJaz T3R 13PKJaz T4 13PKJaz T4R 16PKJaz T5 16PKJaz T5R 10Rock T1 10Rock T1R 12Rock T2 12Rock T2R 14Rock T3 14Rock T3R 16Rock T4 16Rock T4R 18Rock T5 18Rock T5R 8Pop T1 8Pop T1R 10Pop T2 10Pop T2R 12Pop T3 12Pop T3R 13Pop T4 13Pop T4R 16Pop T5 16Pop T5R 8Antiq T1 8Antiq T1R 10Antiq T2 10Antiq T2R 12Antiq T3 12Antiq T3R 13Antiq T4 13Antiq T4R 16Antiq T5 16Antiq T5R

*P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P *P

761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780

14CstmDK HB 14CstmDK HE 14Medium HB 14Medium HE 13KZComb HB 13KZComb HE 13P-Crsp HB 13P-Crsp HE Distorted HB Distorted HE Lo-Fi HH 808Chick HH 909Power HH Impulse HH Super-Q HH DistJingleHH MtlCrasherHH Jingle HH Beads HH Ratchet HH

811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831

20JazZ Rd 20JazZ RdBl 20JazZ RdEg 20HvyDKRd 20HvyDKRdBl 20HvyDKRdEg 20ASpecRd 20ASpecRdBl 20ASpecRdEg 20KSpecRd 20KSpecRdBl 20KSpecRdEg 20VntZ Rd 20VntZ RdBl 20VntZ RdEg 19JzCrsRd 19JzCrsRdBl 19JzCrsRdEg 19P-CrsRd 19P-CrsRdBl 19P-CrsRdEg

*P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I *P *I

EXP CRASH
No. Name Remark

EXP PERCUSSION
No. Name

781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792

15PaperCrBw 15PaperCrEg 16PoP CrBw 16PoP CrEg 18PoP CrBw 18PoP CrEg 17DarK CrBw 17DarK CrEg 18DarK CrBw 18DarK CrEg 18JazZ CrBw 18JazZ CrEg

*I *I *I *I *I *I

EXP SPLASH
No. Name

793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800

4Paper SpBw 4Paper SpEg 6Splaz SpBw 6Splaz SpEg 10UF SpBw 10UF SpEg 10ChinaSpBw 10ChinaSpEg

EXP TOM ELEC

No. Name

EXP CHINA
No. Name Remark

741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760

ClscElec5 T1 ClscElec5 T2 ClscElec5 T3 ClscElec5 T4 ClscElec6 T1 ClscElec6 T2 ClscElec6 T3 ClscElec6 T4 ClscElec7 T1 ClscElec7 T2 ClscElec7 T3 ClscElec7 T4 ClscElec8 T1 ClscElec8 T2 ClscElec8 T3 ClscElec8 T4 ClscElec9 T1 ClscElec9 T2 ClscElec9 T3 ClscElec9 T4

801 802 803 804 805 806

13Latin Bw 13Latin Eg 14Trash Bw 14Trash Eg 20CB Low Bw 20CB Low Eg

*I *I *I

EXP STACKED CYMBAL

No. Name Remark

807 808 809 810

16Stackd Bw 16Stackd Eg 18Stackd Bw 18Stackd Eg

*I *I

832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872

Timbale2Hi Timbale2HiRm Timb2HiPaila Timbale2Lo Timbale2LoRm Timb2LoPaila Pandeiro2 Pande2 Slap Pande2 Close Pande2 Edge Pande2 Roll1 Pande2 Roll2 Caixa Caixa Rim Cajon2 Bass Cajon2 Close Cajon2 Open Cajon2 Slap Bendir Darabuka Dom Darabuka Tak AnkleBeads AfricaJingle Cabasa2 Tambourine4 TambStick TambShake Sagat Close Sagat Open MetalCrasher ConcertBD2 ConcertBD2mt LargeGong Timpani2 C Timpani2 G HiraTaiko HiraTaikoRim YaguraTaiko YaguraTaikoR NagodoTaiko NagadoTaikoR

135

Drum Instrument List

EXP SFX
No. Name

About remarks
*P (Position): Can get various changes of the sound in accordance with the positioning where on the pad you hit with a stick. In rim sounds, can get such various changes of the sound in accordance with the depth of the stick on the rim. *I (Interval): Can make the sound so smooth in accordance with a roll or continuous strokes with sticks. *X (XStick): When the Cross Stick Switch is turned ON, it makes possible to use both Rim Shot and Cross Stick on the rim. *BRUSH: Can be played using Brush Sweep.

873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900

Tick Chick Random ReverbSlap Hammer Anvil MetalDoor MetalPhase RvsMtlFaze WhiteLazer CosmicWater CosmicDrip CosmicClaps CosmicChirp Falling FlyAway BounceDown TimeTunnel1 TimeTunnel2 SpaceTrip Growl Ripping SpaceAlien SpaceWarp Shake ShakeDown Gear GearLong

Copyright
When you purchase the TD-20X percussion sound module from an authorized Roland dealer, the included sounds are licensed, not sold, to you by Roland Corporation, for commercial use in music production, public performance, broadcast, etc. You may use any of the included sounds in a commercial or noncommercial recording without paying any additional license fees. However, you must strictly adhere to the following crediting guidelines on any music recording that utilize material from TD-20X. Reproduction or duplication of any of the sound contained in the TD-20X, either as they exist on this sound module or by any means of reformatting, mixing, filtering, resynthesizing, processing or otherwise editing for use in another product or for re-sale, is strictly prohibited without the express written consent of Roland. All unauthorized giving, trading, lending, renting, re-issue, redistribution or re-sale of the sounds included in the TD-20X are expressly prohibited. In Plain English: Be creative in your application of the TD-20X sounds, and keep this sounds for your use only. DO NOT COPY IT.

About snare/tom instruments

The last letter of each instrument name means the sound of head shot, or rim shot. (Example) S: head sound of Snare SR: rim sound of Snare T1: head sound of Tom 1 T1R: rim sound of Tom 1

EXP OTHER
No. Name

901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920

Group Claps High Claps Mid Claps Low Claps Hi-Q Claps Reverb Claps IronWhip Ratchet Drawer Explosion ElecRide ElecRide Bl ElecRide Eg Revrs Kick Revrs Snare Revrs Crash2 Revrs China2 AcousGuitar FingerBass SlapBass

About cymbal instruments

The last letter of each instrument name means the sound of bow shot, edge shot, or bell shot. (Example) HH/HB: HHEg/HE: CrBw: CrEg: Rd: RdBl: RdEg:

EXP OFF
No. Name

921

EXP Off

bow sound of hi-hat edge sound of hi-hat bow sound of crash edge sound of crash bow sound of ride bell sound of ride edge sound of ride

* Special thanks to Spectrasonics.

136

Note Number (Factory Settings)

Percussion Set
1. Latin Toys

Drum Kit
Drum Kit 150 (Trigger Inputs)
(7) Closed HH Rim (for_BrushSweep) (p. 54) (11) Ride-Edge (7) Open HH Rim (12) AUX1 (12) AUX1 Rim (13) AUX2 (13) AUX2 Rim (14) AUX3 (14) AUX3 Rim (15) AUX4 (15) AUX4 Rim (1) Kick Rim (1) Kick (for_X-Stick) (p. 54) (2) Snare (6) Tom4 Rim (2) Snare Rim (6) Tom4 (7) Closed HH (5) Tom3 (7) Pedal HH (4) Tom2 (7) Open HH (4) Tom2 Rim (3) Tom1 (8) Crash1 (3) Tom1 Rim (10) Ride (9) Crash2 Rim (10) Ride Rim (8) Crash1 Rim (9) Crash2 (5) Tom3 Rim (11) Ride-Edge Rim

Note No.
C4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 68 69 70 71 C5 72 73 74 75 76 77 79 80 81 82 83 C6 84 85 86 87 88 89 91 92 93 94 95 C7 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 C8 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 C9 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 90 78

Note No.
C-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 C0 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 C1 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 C2 36 37 38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 C3 48 49 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 58 59 54 42 30 18 6

Bass Gliss GuitarScrtch WahGt1 Down WahGt1 Up WahGt2 Down WahGt2 Up CR78Guiro CR78Tamb TR808Clap TR808Cowbell TR808Maracas TR909Clap Hi-Q R8Slap Scratch2 Scratch3 Sticks Click MetroClick MetroBell Clap VibraSlap SquareBlock Off Beep Crotale SquareBlock 6"SplazhSpEg 6"SplazhSpBw Guiro Short Guiro Long Cuica Hi Cuica Lo Cowbell Hi Cowbell Lo Cowbell Lo Cowbell Mute Tambourine1 Tambourine2 Conga LoMute Tambourine1 Conga Lo Claves Conga Hi Claves Bongo Lo Claves Bongo LoSlap Bongo Hi Triangle Bongo HiSlap SleighBell Agogo Lo BellTree Tambourine1 TriangleCls Cowbell Mute Agogo Hi Conga HiSlap TreeChimes

67

Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Conga Hi Conga HiSlap Conga Lo Timbale Hi Timbale Lo Agogo Hi Agogo Lo Cabasa Maracas WhistleShort Whistle Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Block Hi Block Lo Cuica Hi Cuica Lo TriangleCls Triangle Shaker SleighBell BellTree Castanet Surdo LoMute Surdo Lo Bongo HiSlap Bongo LoSlap Conga HiMute Conga LoMute PandeiroMute Pandeiro PandeiroSlap TreeChimes Crotale Gong Cajon Bass Cajon Mute Cajon Slap CowbellMambo SquareBlock Caxixi Timbale HiRm TimbalePaila Cuica Acc Surdo Hi Surdo HiMute PotDrum PotDrum Acc PotDrum Mute Djembe Tone Djembe Slap Djembe Bass TalkingDr TalkingDr Up Tabla Na Tabla Te Tabla Ti Tabla Tun Baya Ge Baya Gin Baya Ka Baya Slide ConcertBD HandCymbal Off

Up to eight percussion sets can be stored. You can change the used instruments in each percussion set. For details, refer to Percussion Set Settings (p. 73).

137

Backing Instrument List

PC CC0 Name VOICES 20

PIANO
1 0 8 16 0 8 0 8 0 8 PIANO 1 PIANO 1W PIANO 1D PIANO 2 PIANO 2W PIANO 3 PIANO 3W HONKY-TONK HONKY-TONK W 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 21 22 23 24

0 8 16 0 0 8 0 0

CHURCH ORG.1 CHURCH ORG.2 CHURCH ORG.3 REED ORGAN ACCORDION FR ACCORDION IT HARMONICA BANDONEON

1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2

SYN. BASS
39 0 1 8 64 65 66 0 16 64 65 66 67 SYNTH BASS 1 SYNTHBASS101 SYNTH BASS 3 TB33 BS 1 TB33 BS 2 TB33 BS 3 SYNTH BASS 2 RUBBER BASS SH101 BS 1 SH101 BS 2 SH101 BS 3 MODULAR BASS 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2

2 3 4

40

GUITAR
25 26 0 0 8 64 0 8 0 8 0 64 65 66 67 0 64 0 8 64 65 66 67 0 8 NYLON-STR.GT STEEL-STR.GT 12-STR.GT NYLON+STEEL JAZZ GT. HAWAIIAN GT. CLEAN GT. CHORUS GT. MUTED GT. MUTED GT.2 POP GT. FUNK GT. FUNK GT.2 OVERDRIVE GT FDBK.ODRV.GT DISTORTIONGT FEEDBACK GT. HEAVY GT. FDBK. HVY.GT MUTED DIS.GT ROCK RHYTHM GT.HARMONICS GT. FEEDBACK 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 52 53 54 55 56

E. PIANO
5 0 8 24 64 65 0 64 E.PIANO 1 DETUNED EP 1 60S E.PIANO FM+SA EP HARD EP E.PIANO 2 BRIGHT FM EP 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 27 28 29

ORCHESTRA
41 42 43 44 45 * * 46 47 48 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VIOLIN SLOW VIOLIN VIOLA CELLO CONTRABASS TREMOLO STR PIZZICATOSTR HARP TIMPANI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CLAVI
7 0 8 16 24 0 64 HARPSICHORD COUPLED HPS. HARPSI.W HARPSI.O CLAV. FUNK CLAV. 1 2 2 2 1 2 30 31

STRINGS
49 50 51 0 8 0 0 8 64 65 0 0 32 0 0 0 STRINGS ORCHESTRA SLOW STRINGS SYN.STRINGS1 SYN.STRINGS3 SYN.STRINGS4 OB STRINGS SYN.STRINGS2 CHOIR AAHS CHOIR AAHS 2 VOICE OOHS SYNVOX ORCHESTRAHIT 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

CHROMATIC PERCUSSION
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 8 9 0 CELESTA GLOCKENSPIEL MUSIC BOX VIBRAPHONE VIB.W MARIMBA XYLOPHONE TUBULAR-BELL CHURCH BELL CARILLON SANTUR 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 *: 32

VELOCITY SWITCH The tone switches at velocity 116.

BASS
33 34 0 64 0 64 65 0 64 65 0 0 64 65 66 0 ACOUSTIC BS. ELCTRC.AC.BS FINGERED BS. FUNK BASS REGGAE BASS PICKED BS. MUTE PICKBS1 MUTE PICKBS2 FRETLESS BS. SLAP BASS 1 SLAP BASS 3 RESO SLAP SLAP BASS 4 SLAP BASS 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 59 60 61 62

BRASS
57 58 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 8 TRUMPET TROMBONE TROMBONE 2 TUBA MUTEDTRUMPET FRENCH HORN FR.HORN 2 BRASS 1 BRASS 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2

16

35

ORGAN
17 0 8 16 32 64 65 0 8 32 0 ORGAN 1 DETUNED OR.1 60S ORGAN 1 ORGAN 4 SC88 ORGAN 4 EVEN BAR ORGAN 2 DETUNED OR.2 ORGAN 5 ORGAN 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 36 37

18

38

19

138

Backing Instrument List

SYN. BRASS
63 0 8 16 64 65 66 67 0 8 16 64 65 66 SYNTH BRASS1 SYNTH BRASS3 ANALOGBRASS1 SYNTH BRASS5 POLY BRASS QUACK BRASS OCTAVE BRASS SYNTH BRASS2 SYNTH BRASS4 ANALOGBRASS2 SOFT BRASS VELO BRASS 1 VELO BRASS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2

88

0 64 65

BASS & LEAD BIG & RAW FAT & PERKY

2 2 2

115 116 117

0 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 9 0

STEEL DRUMS WOODBLOCK CASTANETS TAIKO CONCERT BD MELO. TOM 1 MELO. TOM 2 SYNTH DRUM 808 TOM ELEC PERC. REVERSE CYM.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

SYN. PAD
89 90 0 0 64 65 0 64 0 0 0 64 0 0 64 65 FANTASIA WARM PAD THICK PAD HORN PAD POLYSYNTH 80S POLYSYN SPACE VOICE BOWED GLASS METAL PAD PANNER PAD HALO PAD SWEEP PAD POLAR PAD CONVERGE 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1

118 119

64

91 92 93 94

120

GUITAR BASS FX
121 0 1 64 65 66 67 GT.FRETNOISE GT.CUT NOISE WAH BRUSH GT GT. SLIDE GT. SCRATCH BASS SLIDE 1 1 1 1 1 1

REED
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOPRANO SAX ALTO SAX TENOR SAX BARITONE SAX OBOE ENGLISH HORN BASSOON CLARINET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

95 96

SYN. SFX
97 98 0 0 64 65 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 64 65 66 0 ICE RAIN SOUNDTRACK ANCESTRAL PROLOGUE CRYSTAL SYN MALLET ATMOSPHERE BRIGHTNESS GOBLIN ECHO DROPS ECHO BELL ECHO PAN ECHO PAN 2 BIG PANNER RESO PANNER STAR THEME 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

SFX
122 123 0 1 0 1 2 3 5 0 1 3 0 1 3 5 0 2 9 64 0 3 0 2 3 BREATH NOISE FL.KEY CLICK SEASHORE RAIN THUNDER WIND BUBBLE BIRD DOG BIRD 2 TELEPHONE 1 TELEPHONE 2 DOOR WIND CHIMES HELICOPTER CAR-STOP BURST NOISE SPACE TRI. APPLAUSE PUNCH GUN SHOT LASERGUN EXPLOSION Program number (Instrument number) Value of control change number 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2

PIPE
73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PICCOLO FLUTE RECORDER PAN FLUTE BOTTLE BLOW SHAKUHACHI WHISTLE OCARINA 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1

99 100 101 102 103

124

125

126

SYN. LEAD
81 0 1 8 0 1 8 64 65 0 0 0 64 65 66 0 0 64 SQUARE WAVE SQUARE SINE WAVE SAW WAVE SAW DOCTOR SOLO BIG LEAD WASPY SYNTH SYN.CALLIOPE CHIFFER LEAD CHARANG DIST. LEAD 1 DIST. LEAD 2 FUNK LEAD SOLO VOX 5TH SAW WAVE BIG FIVES 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

104

ETHNIC MISC
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 0 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 SITAR SITAR 2 BANJO SHAMISEN KOTO TAISHO KOTO KALIMBA BAGPIPE FIDDLE SHANAI 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

127 128

82

PC: CC0:

83 84 85

VOICES: Number of voices used * To switch instruments from the external MIDI device, send 0 on the CC32# (Control Change Bank Select) from the external MIDI device to the TD-20. * The value of the CC32# (Control Change Bank Select) that the TD-20 transmits is always 0.

86 87

PERCUSSIVE
113 114 0 0 TINKLE BELL AGOGO 1 1

139

Preset Pattern List

No. Name T.Sig 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 15/8 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 6/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 6/ 8 Len 17 18 8 2 18 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 16 8 4 8 16 24 26 4 4 8 4 8 8 8 8 4 4 8 8 8 4 4 4 2 4 8 8 18 12 26 16 17 12 19 15 8 21 Tempo 120 120 112 112 95 88 105 80 89 74 82 67 115 212 212 130 130 100 128 140 118 111 100 89 113 104 104 111 110 164 148 114 124 112 140 100 94 92 90 114 132 102 130 112 96 80 73 85 102 50 PlayT LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP No. 51 Slow 52 Reggae 53 Rastamon 54 Salsa 1 55 Salsa 2 56 Songo 57 Latin Jazz 58 Afro Jazz 59 Smooth Jazz 60 Modern Jazz 61 Blues Latin 62 12Bar Blues 63 Surfpunk 64 Rockabilly 65 Funk Hop 66 Funk 5/4A 67 Funk 4/4B 68 King Strut 69 Krunkn' 70 Start & Stop 71 Prowl 72 Guttn' 73 Ambient 74 Rockin'A8bar 75 Rockin'B8bar 76 Shufflin'Itr 77 Shufflin'A8 78 Shufflin'B10 79 4 & 7 A 2bar 80 4 & 7 B 2bar 81 Samba 82 Sitar Rag 83 Aco Bass 84 BrassSection 85 Jazz End 86 OrchString1 87 OrchString2 88 OrchString3 89 StrChord 90 DiscoTapBass 91 TrashBass 92 Applause 93 Sweep pad 1 94 Sweep pad 2 95 Grv Bass 96 Strings 97 Pad&Bass 98 Synchord1 99 7 Notes 100 12 Notes Name T.Sig 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 5/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 15/8 15/8 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 Len 4 8 4 17 20 16 26 22 20 28 12 12 4 24 4 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 10 2 2 1 17 4 5 6 8 8 8 8 1 1 4 8 8 2 8 8 3 7 12 Tempo 69 122 86 115 102 109 167 194 183 136 55 55 130 192 102 86 86 84 94 112 80 68 96 100 100 140 140 140 115 115 120 100 160 160 60 128 128 128 150 120 120 120 80 80 120 128 80 120 128 128 PlayT LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP VLINK VLINK 1 Preview 2 Preview Jazz 3 Drums Basic 4 Drums Fill 5 Rockin' Hard 6 Night Groove 7 Fast Track 8 Water Fall 9 Smooth Sail 10 Bug Juice 11 Strunk 12 Faced 13 4 & 7 14 Swing A 15 Swing B 16 Latin 4 bars 17 Latin 8 bars 18 Rockin' 19 Rollin' 20 Shufflin' 21 Minoplis 22 Grr-unge 23 Rockmay 24 Shoot! 25 Jammin' 26 Clap Happy 27 Happy R&B 28 Holiday 29 Cruisin' 30 Festival 31 Let's Roll 32 Woa 33 Pop X 34 Purplroq 35 Pop'n Love 36 In the House 37 Smoove 38 Shuffle Bop 39 Funky Alley 40 Old Soul 41 Brown Funk 42 Thick Funk 43 Up Shuffle 44 R&B Shuffle 45 Shuffle Grv 46 R&B Groove 47 Smooth Grv 48 Slow Fusion 49 Country Blld 50 6/8 Ballad

140

Preset Pattern List

No.

Name

T.Sig 4/ 4 4/ 4 12/8 4/ 4 2/ 4 2/ 4 2/ 4 2/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4 4/ 4

Len 10 13 9 9 1 1 1 1 24 26 1 3 8 4 4 1 2 1 2 2 28 6 6 2 1 2 1 8 8 2 32 16 17 16 8 36 18 32 4 2 3 16 41 25 31 4 2 2 1 1

Tempo 120 180 100 152 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 168 168 168 168 120 120 120 120 120 112 112 112 112 112 112 160 160 160 160 120

PlayT LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP ONE SHOT ONE SHOT ONE SHOT ONE SHOT TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP ONE SHOT LOOP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP LOOP LOOP LOOP LOOP TAP

101 Drums POP 102 Drums JAZZ 103 Drums BALLAD 104 Drums H.ROCK 105 Roll Snr Rim 106 Roll Tom1Rim 107 Roll Tom2Rim 108 Roll Tom3Rim 109 AsianRoad 1 110 AsianRoad 2 111 AsianRoad 3 112 Tune Bass 113 Tune Chord 114 Tune Arp A1 115 Tune Arp A2 116 Tune Arp B1 117 Tune Arp B2 118 Tune Arp C1 119 Tune Arp C2 120 Tune Ending 121 Tune Arp Gm6 122 Melo Arp A1 123 Melo Arp A2 124 Melo Arp B1 125 Melo Arp B2 126 Melo Arp C1 127 Melo Arp C2 128 Melo Cho 1 129 Melo Cho 2 130 Melo Cho 3 131 neo Chord 1 132 neo Chord 2 133 neo Chord 3 134 8 Chords 135 Jam Fretless 136 Jam SynVibe 137 Jam Vibes 138 Jam Sweep 139 Jam D/E 140 Rock Rhythm 141 Rock Bass 142 RockGt Chrds 143 RockGt Lead1 144 RockGt Lead2 145 RockGt Lead3 146 D-N-B BREAK 147 FunkyJungl 1 148 FunkyJungl 2 149 FunkySnrRoll 150 LayerKickRim

T.Sig: Time Signature Len: Pattern Length Play T (Play Type): See p. 78.

141

MIDI Implementation Chart

PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (SOUND GENERATOR SECTION) Model TD-20X

Function...

Date : July 1, 2009 Version : 1.00

Remarks
Memorized

MIDI Implementation Chart

Transmitted 116, OFF 116, OFF Mode 3 X
**************

Recognized 116, OFF 116, OFF Mode 3 X

**************

Basic Channel

Default Changed Default Messages Altered

Mode

Note Number : Velocity After Touch Pitch Bend

0127 True Voice Note On Note Off Keys Channels

**************

0127 0127 O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0127 0127 O X X X O X O (120, 126, 127) O X O (123127) O X *4 Backing part only. *5 O X is selectable.

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64 O X X 0, 32 1 2 4 6, 38 7 10 11 1619 64 91 93 100, 101 O O O O X X X O O X X X X *3

*4 *3

*4 *4 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4 *4 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4 *4 *4 *4 *5 Bank Select Modulation Breath Controller Foot Controller Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression General Purpose Controller 14 Hold 1 Effects 1 (Reverb Send Level) Effects 3 (Chorus Send Level) RPN LSB, MSB Program No. 1128

(Pad, Pedal) *1 *2 *3 (Pad, Pedal) *1 *2 *3 (Pad, Pedal) *1 *2 *3

Control Change

(Pad, Pedal) *1 *2 *3 (Pad, Pedal) *1 *2 *3

Program Change

O 0127 : True Number

**************

*5

System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages : Song Position : Song Select : Tune Request : Clock : Commands
: All Sound Off : Reset All Controllers : Local On/Off : All Notes Off : Active Sensing : System Reset

O X X X X X X X X X O X

Notes

*1 One is selected as the strike position. *2 One is selected as the hi-hat control pedal. *3 Drum part only.
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

O : Yes X : No

142

PERCUSSION SOUND MODULE (SEQUENCER SECTION) Model TD-20X

Function...

Date : July 1, 2009 Version : 1.00

Remarks
Memorized

MIDI Implementation Chart

Transmitted 116, OFF 116, OFF Mode 3 X
**************

Recognized 116, OFF 116, OFF Mode 3 X

**************

Basic Channel

Default Changed Default Messages Altered

Mode

Note Number : Velocity After Touch Pitch Bend

0127 True Voice Note On Note Off Keys Channels

**************

0127 0127 O O O X O X O O O X X X O O O X X X X *3

O 9nH, v = 1127 O 8nH, v = 64 O X O 0, 32 1 2 4 6, 38 7 10 11 1619 64 91 93 100, 101 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0127 *3

*4 *6 *7 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4 *6 *7 *6 *7 *10 *4 *6 *7 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4 *4 *6 *7 *4 *6 *7 *4 *6 *7 *5 *6 *7

*4 Bank Select Modulation Breath Controller Foot Controller Data Entry Volume Panpot Expression General Purpose Controller 14 Hold 1 Effects 1 (Reverb Send Level) Effects 3 (Chorus Send Level) RPN LSB, MSB Program No. 1128
Only reception/transmission of Bulk Data.

*1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3

Control Change

*1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3 *4

Program Change

: True Number

**************

System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages : Song Position : Song Select : Tune Request : Clock : Commands
: All Sound Off : Reset All Controllers : Local On/Off : All Notes Off : Active Sensing : System Reset

O X X X O O X X X X X X
*1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6

O X X X O O O O X O (123127) X X *8 *9

Notes

One is selected as the strike position. One is selected as the hi-hat control pedal. Drum part only. Backing part only. O X is selectable. Transmits when pattern is selected.

*7 Transmits when modified. *8 Receives when Sync Mode setting is EXTERNAL or AUTO. *9 Receives when Sync Mode setting is EXTERNAL, AUTO, or REMOTE. *10 Except drum part.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes X : No

143

Drums
Head

INST
INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST

COMP/ EQ
COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ COMP/EQ

MIXER /VOLUME
Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume

MIXER /KIT VOL

AMBIENCE
AMB Send

1 KICK

Rim Head

KICK SNARE TOMS

AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send

2 SNARE 3 TOM1 : 6 TOM4 7 HI-HAT

Rim Head Rim Head Rim Head

HI-HAT CRASH 1 CRASH 2 RIDE

AUX1

AMB Send

8 CRASH1

Rim Head

Kit Volume

AMB Send AMB Send

Drums

AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send AMB Send

9 CRASH2

Rim Head

10 RIDE 11 EDGE 12 AUX1

Rim Head Rim Head

Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume

Rim Head

(AUX)

13 AUX2

AUX2
AMB Send AMB Send

14 AUX3

Rim Head

AUX3
AMB Send AMB Send

15 AUX4
Block Diagram

Rim

AUX4
Volume AMB Send

Percussion Set
PATTERN/PART /PERC/EDIT/EDIT PERC
INST Volume Volume

MIDI CC#7 (Volume)

AMBIENCE
TYPE ROOM

PERC

Volume

REV Send

Backing Part
MELODY BASS BACK 1 BACK 2
INST INST INST INST

PATTERN /PART /MIXER /VOLUME

Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume REV Send REV Send REV Send REV Send

BACKING

Volume Volume Volume

PATTERN /PART /BACKING

GROUP FADERS
PART REVERB
Type Time

TEMPO/CLICK/INST

Click

INST

CLICK

AMB Send

CLICK ([SHIFT] + [TEMPO])

switch with [FADER]

TD-20X Block Diagram

144

MULTI EFFECTS
MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send MFX Send

MIXER /PAN

SETUP /OUTPUT /MASTER

MASTER COMP/EQ
COMP EQ

COMP

EQ

SETUP /OUTPUT /DIRECT

DIGITAL OUT

L/MONO MASTER

MASTER
R

SETUP /OUTPUT /OTHER

DIRECT 1 DIRECT 2 DIRECT 3

MULTI EFFECTS (MFX)

DIRECT 4 DIRECT 5 (L)

PAN

CHO Send

DIRECT 6 (R) DIRECT 7 (L)

SETUP /OUTPUT /OTHER

PAN
CHO Send CHO Send CHO Send CHO Send

DIRECT 8 (R)

PART CHORUS
Type Rate Depth PHONES

PHONES

PAN

MASTER OUT (L) MASTER OUT (R) PHONES OUT (L) PHONES OUT (R)

MASTER (L) MASTER (R) PHONES (L) PHONES (R) DIRECT 1 DIRECT 2 DIRECT 3 DIRECT 4 DIRECT 5 (L) DIRECT 6 (R) DIRECT 7 (L) DIRECT 8 (R)

MIX IN
MIX IN

145

Specifications
TD-20X: Percussion Sound Module
Sound Generator Maximum Polyphony Instruments Drum Kits Drum Kit Chains Variable Drum Modeling Sequencer 64 Voices Drum Instruments: 920 Backing Instruments: 262 100 16 chains (32 steps per chain) Faders V-EDIT (KICK): Shell Depth, Beater Type, Head Type, Head Tuning, Muffling, Snare Buzz, Mic Position, Mic Size, Kit Resonance V-EDIT (SNARE): Shell Material, Shell Depth, Head Type, Head Tuning, Muffling, Strainer Adjustment, Mic Position, Add Rim Sound, Add Rim Sound Level V-EDIT (TOM): Shell Depth, Head Type, Head Tuning, Muffling, Snare Buzz, Mic Position V-EDIT (HI-HAT): Cymbal Size, Add Sound, Add Sound Level, Mic Position, Fixed Hi-Hat V-EDIT (CYMBAL): Cymbal Size, Sizzle Type, Sizzle Amount, Sustain, Mic Position EDIT: Pitch, Decay, Dynamic Bend, Bend Depth, Bend Time Room Type (25 types), Room Size, Wall Type, Mic Position, Room Shape Volume, Pan, Minimum Volume, Ambience Send Level, Multi-Effects Send Level, Output Assign Pad Equalizer (each pad) Pad Compressor (each pad) Multi-Effects (13 types) Master Compressor Master Equalizer Reverb (for backing part) Chorus (for backing part) 8 Preview Button Trigger Input Jack x 15 Hi-Hat Control Jack (VH series, FD series) Master Output Jacks (L/MONO, R) Direct Output Jack x 8 Digital Output Jack (COAXIAL type, 44.1 kHz / 24-bit) Headphones Jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type) Mix in Jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type) MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/THRU) Footswitch Jack (1/4 inch TRS phone type) CompactFlash Card Slot AC Inlet 1.0 k ohms 16 W 307 (W) x 256 (D) x 105 (H) mm 12-1/8 (W) x 10-1/8 (D) x 4-3/16 (H) inches 2.7 kg / 6 lbs Owners Manual, Power Cord Pads (PD series, PDX series) Cymbals (CY series) Kick Triggers (KD series) Hi-Hat (VH series) Hi-Hat Control Pedal (FD series) Stands (MDS series) Cymbal Mount (MDY series) Pad Mount (MDH series) Display User Patterns: 100 Preset Patterns: 150 Parts: 6 Play Type: Oneshot, Loop, Tap Tempo: 20260 Resolution: 192 ticks per quarter note Recording Method: Realtime Maximum Note Storage: approx. 20,000 Notes Click Instruments: 20 64 x 240 dots (backlit graphic LCD) 7 segments, 3 characters (LED) Trigger Level Indicator (LED) 8

Connectors

Instrument Parameters

Output Impedance

Power Consumption
Dimensions Weight Accessories

Ambience Parameters Mixer Parameters

Options

Effect Types

Percussion Sets

In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.

146

Index
Symbols
[-] [+] buttons ..................................................................................... 17, 28 CompactFlash ...................................................................... 19, 31, 8995 Formatting .......................................................................................... 94 Compressor ................................................................................................. 59 Compressor/equalizer (COMP/EQ) .............................................. 36, 58 Connecting .......................................................................................... 21, 23 [COPY] button ........................................ 16, 42, 44, 54, 57, 68, 75, 106 Copying Drum Kit .............................................................................................. 42 Drum Kit Chain .................................................................................. 44 Effect Settings ................................................................................... 68 Instrument .......................................................................................... 54 Mixer Settings .................................................................................... 57 Pattern .................................................................................................. 86 Percussion set .................................................................................... 75 Trigger Bank .................................................................................... 106 Copyright ........................................................................................... 69, 136 Count In Play .............................................................................................. 82 Count In Rec ............................................................................................... 82 CRASH ........................................................................................................... 51 Cross Stick ..................................................................................... 32, 41, 54 Crosstalk .................................................................................................... 101 Cursor ............................................................................................................ 28 [CURSOR] buttons ...................................................................... 17, 28, 69 Curve ............................................................................................................. 98 CY-15R/14C ................................................................................................. 33 Cymbal .......................................................................................................... 33

Numerics
3Way Trigger (Ride & Edge) ............................................................... 105

A
AC IN ............................................................................................................. 18 Add Rim Sound ......................................................................................... 49 Advanced trigger parameters ........................................................... 102 AMB SEND LEVEL ..................................................................................... 56 Amb Send Level ....................................................................................... 81 AMBIENCE ................................................................................................... 58 Ambience ............................................................................................ 36, 60 [AMBIENCE] button ................................................................................. 60 Atck (Attack) .............................................................................................. 59 Attack .................................................................................................... 59, 66

B
Backing Instrument List ....................................................................... 138 Backing Parts ...................................................................................... 72, 77 Backup Functions .................................................................................... 15 Basic Pitch ................................................................................................... 51 Basic trigger parameters ....................................................................... 97 BEAT DELAY ............................................................................................... 63 Beater Type ................................................................................................ 49 Bell shot ....................................................................................................... 33 Bend Depth ................................................................................................ 51 Bend Range ................................................................................................ 72 Bend Time ................................................................................................... 51 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 144 Bow shot ..................................................................................................... 33 Brush Note No. .......................................................................................... 54 Brush Switch .............................................................................................. 40 Bulk Dump ................................................................................................ 119

D
Decay Time .......................................................................................... 51, 74 DELAY ........................................................................................................... 63 Deleting Data from a CompactFlash card ................................................. 94 Pattern .................................................................................................. 88 Pattern from a CompactFlash card ............................................ 90 Demo Songs ............................................................................................... 26 Depth ............................................................................................................ 77 Device ID ................................................................................................... 117 DIGITAL OUT connector ......................................................................... 18 DIRECT OUT jacks ............................................................................ 18, 108 Display .......................................................................................................... 16 Display Contrast .............................................................................. 26, 113 Dissolve Time .......................................................................................... 124 DISTORTION ................................................................................................ 64 Drum Instrument ............................................................................ 46, 131 DRUM KIT ..................................................................................................... 17 Drum Kit ................................................................................................ 35, 39 Drum Kit Chain ................................................................................... 43, 45 DRUM KIT Screen ................................................................................... 39 During Play .................................................................................................. 82 During Rec ................................................................................................... 82 Dynamic Bend ............................................................................................ 51 Dynamic Interval Control Function .................................................... 13 Dynamic Pitch Bend ................................................................................ 51 Dynamics .................................................................................................. 112

C
[CARD] button ............................................................................. 17, 9195 CC .................................................................................................................. 74 CC Max ....................................................................................................... 100 CC Resolution .................................................................................. 99100 [CHAIN] button ........................................................................... 16, 43, 45 Channel ..................................................................................................... 115 CHINA ........................................................................................................... 51 Cho Send Level ......................................................................................... 74 Choke play .................................................................................................. 34 CHORUS ................................................................................................ 64, 77 Click ........................................................................................................ 30, 81 Clip .............................................................................................................. 124 Closed (Bow) .............................................................................................. 53 Closed (Edge) ............................................................................................ 53 Cloth ............................................................................................................. 61 [COMP/EQ] button .................................................................................. 59

147

Index

E
Edge shot .................................................................................................... 33 Edit ......................................................................................................... 74, 85 EDIT LOCK ................................................................................................... 46 Editing Pattern ................................................................................................. 85 Editing Drum Sounds ............................................................................. 48 Effects .................................................................................................... 36, 58 [EFFECTS SWITCH] button .................................................................... 58 ENHANCER ................................................................................................. 64 Equalizer ...................................................................................................... 60 Erasing Pattern ................................................................................................. 87 Error Messages ........................................................................................ 126 [EXIT] button .............................................................................................. 17 EXP ................................................................................................................ 46

Hit Pad Start ................................................................................................ 84 Hold ............................................................................................................... 59

I
Initialize Compact Flash ................................................................................... 94 Input ........................................................................................................... 113 INST ................................................................................................................ 46 Inst .......................................................................................................... 72, 81 [INST] button .............................................................................................. 46 Inst V-Edit Only .......................................................................................... 55 Instrument ............................................................................................ 35, 46 Instrument List ........................................................................................ 131 Instrument Name ............................................................................... 47, 72 Instrument Number ................................................................................. 72 INT .................................................................................................................. 46 Interval .......................................................................................................... 82 INTRVL ........................................................................................................... 47

F
Factory Reset ........................................................................................... 114 Factory settings ...................................................................................... 114 [FADER] button .................................................................................. 30, 56 FD-8 ............................................................................................................. 100 File Names .................................................................................................. 95 Fixed Hi-Hat ............................................................................................... 50 FLANGER ..................................................................................................... 64 Foot Splash Sens ............................................................................ 99100 FOOT SW jack ............................................................................................ 18 Foot Switch .............................................................................................. 110 Formatting CompactFlash ................................................................................... 94 Freq (Frequency) ............................................................................... 60, 66 Function buttons ..................................................................................... 28

K
Key Shift ....................................................................................................... 72 KICK ................................................................................................................ 49 [KIT] button .......................................................................................... 17, 39 Kit Parameters ............................................................................................ 40 Kit Resonance ............................................................................................. 49 Kit Selection ...................................................................................... 15, 121 Kit Tempo .................................................................................................... 40 Kit Volume ............................................................................................ 40, 56 Knee ............................................................................................................... 66

L
Level ................................................................................................ 49, 60, 62 Loading Data from a CompactFlash card ................................................. 93 Pattern from a CompactFlash card ............................................ 90 TD-20 backup data .......................................................................... 93 Local Control ........................................................................................... 117 [LOCK] button ............................................................................................ 46 LO-FI .............................................................................................................. 65 LOOP ............................................................................................................. 78

G
Gain ................................................................................................. 5960, 66 Gain (dB) .................................................................................................... 113 Gain Reduction Meter ............................................................................ 66 Gate ............................................................................................................... 53 GATE REVERB ............................................................................................. 63 Gate Time ............................................................................................. 5354 GROUP FADERS .......................................................................... 17, 30, 56

M
Mask Time ................................................................................................ 103 Master ........................................................................................................... 80 MASTER COMP/EQ ................................................................................... 58 Master Comp/EQ ................................................................................... 112 [MASTER COMP/EQ] button .................................................................. 65 Master compressor .................................................................................. 65 Master EQ .................................................................................................... 65 [MASTER] knob ................................................................................... 17, 25 MASTER OUT jacks ......................................................................... 18, 108 Master Tune ................................................................................................ 72 Master Tuning ............................................................................................ 72 Material ........................................................................................................ 49

H
H & R ........................................................................................ 48, 56, 5962 Head shot .................................................................................................... 32 Head Tension ............................................................................................. 25 Head Tuning ....................................................................................... 4950 Head Type ............................................................................................ 4950 Headphones .............................................................................................. 23 HH Note# Border .................................................................................... 118 HI-HAT .......................................................................................................... 50 Hi-Hat ............................................................................... 25, 33, 5253, 99 Hi-Hat Type ................................................................................................ 99

148

Index

Mesh Head .................................................................................................. 25 Message .................................................................................................... 127 Metronome ................................................................................................ 81 MFX SEND LEVEL ...................................................................................... 56 Mic Position .................................................................................. 4951, 61 Mic Size ........................................................................................................ 49 MIDI ............................................................................................................. 115 MIDI Channel .................................................................................... 84, 115 MIDI IN connector .................................................................................... 18 MIDI OUT/THRU connector .................................................................. 18 MIDI settings Pad ........................................................................................................ 53 MINIMUM VOLUME ................................................................................. 56 Minimum Volume .................................................................................... 56 MIX EDIT ...................................................................................................... 56 MIX IN jack ......................................................................................... 18, 113 [MIX IN] knob ...................................................................................... 17, 25 MIXER Part ....................................................................................................... 76 Mixer ...................................................................................................... 35, 56 [MIXER] button .......................................................................................... 56 Mode .......................................................................................................... 113 Mono Signal ............................................................................................. 113 MOUNT TYPE ........................................................................................... 101 Muffling ................................................................................................ 4950 MULTI EFFECTS ......................................................................................... 58 [MULTI EFFECTS] button ....................................................................... 62 Multi-Effects ........................................................................................ 36, 62 Muting Part ....................................................................................................... 71

OUPUT MONITOR ........................................................................... 41, 122 OutGain (dB) ........................................................................................ 60, 62 Output .......................................................................................................... 82 Output Assignments ............................................................................ 108 Output Level Monitor .......................................................................... 122 Output Meter ............................................................................................. 66 OVERDRIVE .................................................................................................. 64

P
Pad ......................................................................................... 21, 32, 52, 111 Pad Comp/EQ Only .................................................................................. 55 Pad Pattern .......................................................................................... 40, 52 Pad Ptn ......................................................................................................... 52 Pad Ptn Velocity ........................................................................................ 52 Pad Sensitivity ............................................................................................ 97 Pad Switch ................................................................................................ 111 Pad Type ...................................................................................................... 96 PadPtn Master Sw ..................................................................................... 52 Palette ........................................................................................................ 124 PAN ................................................................................................................ 56 Pan .......................................................................................................... 74, 81 PANNING DELAY ....................................................................................... 63 Part .......................................................................................................... 36, 76 PART CHORUS SEND LEVEL ................................................................... 76 PART PAN ..................................................................................................... 76 PART REVERB SEND LEVEL ..................................................................... 76 PART VOLUME ............................................................................................ 76 Pattern ..................................................................................... 36, 70, 83, 86 Playback Type .................................................................................... 78 [PATTERN] button ...................................................................... 6970, 83 Pattern Length .................................................................................... 77, 83 PATTERN screen ..................................................................................... 70 PD-125X/125XS/105X ...................................................................... 25, 32 Pedal ...................................................................................................... 5253 Pedal Bend Range .................................................................................... 52 Pedal CC .................................................................................................... 118 Pedal HH Volume ............................................................................... 40, 56 Perc Note ..................................................................................................... 74 Percussion Instrument .................................................................... 7374 Percussion Part .......................................................................................... 73 Percussion Set ............................................................................................ 73 PHASER ......................................................................................................... 64 PHONES jack ............................................................................................... 19 [PHONES] knob ................................................................................... 17, 25 Pitch ........................................................................................................ 51, 74 PITCH SHIFT ................................................................................................ 64 [PLAY] button ...................................................................................... 69, 71 Play Type ...................................................................................................... 78 Playing Method ......................................................................................... 32 POSI ............................................................................................................... 47 Position Ctrl ................................................................................................ 53 Position Detect ....................................................................................... 105 Position Detection ................................................................................. 105 Positional Sensing .................................................................................... 34

N
Naming Backup ................................................................................................. 92 Drum kit .............................................................................................. 41 Drum Kit Chain ................................................................................. 44 Pattern ................................................................................................. 79 Percussion set ................................................................................... 75 Trigger Bank .................................................................................... 106 Noise Cancel .............................................................................................. 99 Note No. ...................................................................................................... 53 Note Number .................................................................................... 54, 137 Nuance of the rim shot .......................................................................... 32 Number Display ........................................................................................ 16

O
Offset .................................................................................................. 99100 Offset adjustment .................................................................................... 25 ONESHOT .................................................................................................... 78 Open (Bow) ................................................................................................ 53 Open (Edge) ............................................................................................... 53 Open rim shot ........................................................................................... 32 Open/closed .............................................................................................. 33 Other instruments ................................................................................... 51

149

Index

Power ........................................................................................................... 24 [POWER] switch ................................................................................. 18, 24 Preset Drum Kit List ............................................................................... 128 Preset drum kits ........................................................................................ 35 Preset memory .......................................................................................... 31 Preset pattern ............................................................................................ 69 Preset Pattern List .................................................................................. 140 Pressure ....................................................................................................... 33 [PREVIEW] button ............................................................................. 17, 29 Program Changes .................................................................................. 119 Program Version ..................................................................................... 125

Q
Q .............................................................................................................. 60, 66 Quantize ...................................................................................................... 84 Quick Play ................................................................................................... 78

R
Rate ............................................................................................................... 77 Ratio ....................................................................................................... 59, 66 Realtime Recording ................................................................................. 83 [REC] button ........................................................................................ 69, 84 Rec Mode .................................................................................................... 84 Recording ............................................................................................ 8485 Pattern ................................................................................................. 83 Rehearsal ..................................................................................................... 85 Release ......................................................................................................... 66 Rels (Release) ............................................................................................. 59 Remaining Memory .............................................................................. 125 Retrig Cancel ........................................................................................... 103 Retrigger Cancel ..................................................................................... 103 Rev Send Level .......................................................................................... 74 REVERB .................................................................................................. 63, 77 RIDE ............................................................................................................... 51 Ride ............................................................................................................. 105 Ride CC ....................................................................................................... 118 [RIM] button ........................................................................................ 29, 46 Rim Gain .................................................................................................... 104 Rim Shot ............................................................................................. 32, 104 Rim Shot Adjust ...................................................................................... 104 RING MOD ................................................................................................... 65 Room Shape ............................................................................................... 61 Room Size ................................................................................................... 61 Rx ................................................................................................................. 115

Selecting Drum Kit .............................................................................................. 39 Drum Kit Chain .................................................................................. 45 Instrument .......................................................................................... 47 Pattern .................................................................................................. 70 Send Level ........................................................................................... 6162 Sensitivity .................................................................................................... 98 SEQUENCER ................................................................................................ 17 Sequencer ..................................................................................... 36, 69, 83 [SETUP] button ....................................................................... 17, 108, 115 Shallow rim shot ....................................................................................... 32 Shell Depth ......................................................................................... 4950 [SHIFT] button ............................................................................................ 17 Size ......................................................................................................... 5051 Sizzle Amount ............................................................................................ 51 Sizzle Type ................................................................................................... 51 Slave .............................................................................................................. 80 SNARE ........................................................................................................... 49 Snare Buzz ........................................................................................... 4950 Snare CC .................................................................................................... 118 Soft Through ........................................................................................... 116 Soft Thru ................................................................................................... 116 Sound module mounting plate ........................................................... 20 SPLASH ......................................................................................................... 51 STACKED CYMBAL .................................................................................... 51 Stand ............................................................................................................. 20 [STOP] button ............................................................................................ 69 Strainer Adj. ................................................................................................ 49 Sustain .......................................................................................................... 51 Sync Mode ................................................................................................... 80 Synchronizing ............................................................................................ 80

T
TAP ................................................................................................................. 78 Tap Ptn Mute Grp ..................................................................................... 52 Tap Reset Time .......................................................................................... 78 Tap Tempo .................................................................................................. 80 TD-20 ............................................................................................... 13, 46, 93 TDW-20 ........................................................................................... 13, 46, 93 Tempo ...................................................................................... 30, 77, 79, 83 Drum kit ............................................................................................... 40 [TEMPO] button ........................................................................... 30, 69, 79 Thre (Threshold) ........................................................................................ 59 Threshold .............................................................................................. 66, 98 Time ........................................................................................................ 59, 77 Time Signature ........................................................................... 77, 8283 TOM ............................................................................................................... 50 Toms CC .................................................................................................... 118 [TOOLS] button ............................................................................... 16, 121 TRIG SELECT ................................................................................................ 17 TRIG SELECT buttons ........................................................................ 29, 46 Trig Type ...................................................................................................... 97 Trigger Bank ............................................................................................... 96 [TRIGGER] button ............................................................................... 17, 96

S
Saving Data to a CompactFlash card ...................................................... 92 Pattern to a CompactFlash card ................................................ 89 Scan Time ................................................................................................. 102

150

Index

Trigger Information ............................................................................... 123 TRIGGER INPUT jacks .............................................................................. 18 Trigger Level Indicator ........................................................................... 16 Trigger Settings ................................................................................. 36, 96 Trigger Type ............................................................................................... 96 Tx Channel .................................................................................................. 53 Tx/Rx ........................................................................................................... 115 Type .................................................................................. 5960, 62, 66, 77

U
User memory ............................................................................................. 31 User pattern ........................................................................................ 69, 77

V
[VALUE] dial ......................................................................................... 17, 28 Variation ...................................................................................................... 72 V-EDIT ........................................................................................................... 48 Velocity ...................................................................................................... 112 Velocity Curve ........................................................................................... 98 VH-11 .......................................................................................................... 100 VH-12 .............................................................................................. 25, 33, 99 V-LINK ........................................................................................ 78, 118, 123 V-LINK Device ID ..................................................................................... 118 V-LINK MIDI Ch ........................................................................................ 118 VOLUME ...................................................................................................... 56 Volume ................................................................................................. 25, 74 Drum Kit .............................................................................................. 40 VOLUME CONTROL knobs .................................................................... 25

W
Wall Type ..................................................................................................... 61 with Pad Comp/EQ .................................................................................. 55

X
XSTICK .......................................................................................................... 41 XStick Note No. ......................................................................................... 54 XStick Thrshld .......................................................................................... 104 XStick Volume .................................................................................... 40, 56 XSTK .............................................................................................................. 47 XTALK ......................................................................................................... 101 XTALK CANCEL ........................................................................................ 101 XTALK GROUP ......................................................................................... 101

151

For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004/108/EC and LVD 2006/95/EC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment. This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For Canada

NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.

For C.A. US (Proposition 65)

WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.

For EU Countries

For China

Information
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office 9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street, ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis, Cairo 11341, EGYPT TEL: (022)-417-1828

When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below.
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Makati, Metro Manila 1200, PHILIPPINES TEL: (02) 899 9801

CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc. Orionweg 30 Curacao, Netherland Antilles TEL:(305)5926866

URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A. Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C.P.: 11.800 Montevideo, URUGUAY TEL: (02) 924-2335

NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd. Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL: 2273 0074

JORDAN
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD. FREDDY FOR MUSIC P. O. Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL: (06) 5692696

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No.3 Ens.La Esperilla Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic TEL:(809) 683 0305

SINGAPORE
SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE. LTD. 150 Sims Drive, SINGAPORE 387381 TEL: 6846-3676

VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales Allegro,C.A. Av.las industrias edf.Guitar import #7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas, Venezuela TEL: (212) 244-1122

POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O. ul. Kty Grodziskie 16B 03-289 Warszawa, POLAND TEL: (022) 678 9512

KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI & SONS CO. Al-Yousifi Service Center P.O.Box 126 (Safat) 13002 KUWAIT TEL: 00 965 802929

REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann, Chaudron - BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex, REUNION ISLAND TEL: (0262) 218-429

TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TEL: (02) 2561 3339

ECUADOR
Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil - Ecuador TEL:(593-4)2302364

PORTUGAL
Roland Iberia, S.L. Portugal Office Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto 4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL TEL: 22 608 00 60

LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L. George Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857 Beirut, LEBANON TEL: (01) 20-1441

SOUTH AFRICA
T.O.M.S. Sound & Music (Pty)Ltd. 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (011)417 3400 Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd. Royal Cape Park, Unit 24 Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800 Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (021) 799 4900

EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Austrian Office Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8, A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II, Edificio No.4010 San Salvador, EL SALVADOR TEL: 262-0788

ROMANIA
FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1, 535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA TEL: (266) 364 609

THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd. 100-108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem, New Road,Sumpantawongse, Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL: (02) 224-8821

OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C. Malatan House No.1 Al Noor Street, Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL: 2478 3443

GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL:(502) 599-2888

RUSSIA
MuTek Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6 117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA TEL: (095) 981-4967

OCEANIA ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. 5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090, CHINA TEL: (021) 5580-0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. (BEIJING OFFICE) 10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL: (010) 6426-5050

BELGIUM/FRANCE/ HOLLAND/ LUXEMBOURG

Roland Central Europe N.V. Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel (Westerlo) BELGIUM TEL: (014) 575811

QATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio & Stores) P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR TEL: 4423-554

SLOVAKIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o. Povazsk 18. SK - 940 01 Nov Zmky TEL: (035) 6424 330

AUSTRALIA/ NEW ZEALAND

Roland Corporation Australia Pty.,Ltd. 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West. NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel: (02) 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel: (09) 3098 715

HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V. BO.Paz Barahona 3 Ave.11 Calle S.O San Pedro Sula, Honduras TEL: (504) 553-2029

SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Behind Pizza Inn Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building, PO BOX 2154, Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL: (03) 8643601

CROATIA
ART-CENTAR Degenova 3. HR - 10000 Zagreb TEL: (1) 466 8493

SPAIN
Roland Iberia, S.L. Paseo Garca Faria, 33-35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL: 93 493 91 00

MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son Z.I.Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 715222

CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR s.r.o Voctrova 247/16 CZ - 180 00 PRAHA 8, CZECH REP. TEL: (2) 830 20270

SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (0)8 702 00 20

SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound Center PO BOX 13520 BLDG No.17 ABDUL WAHAB KANAWATI.ST RAWDA DAMASCUS, SYRIA TEL: (011) 223-5384

HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. Service Division 22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, HONG KONG TEL: 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd. 8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39 Chatham Road South, T.S.T, Kowloon, HONG KONG TEL: 2333 1863

CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A. Av.Santa Fe 2055 (1123) Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL: (011) 4508-2700

DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL: 3916 6200

SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG Landstrasse 5, Postfach, CH-4452 Itingen, SWITZERLAND TEL:(061)975-9987

TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S. Galip Dede Cad. No.37 Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY TEL: (0212) 249 85 10

MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F. MEXICO TEL: (55) 5668-6699

UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd. P.O.Box: 37-a. Nedecey Str. 30 UA - 89600 Mukachevo, UKRAINE TEL: (03131) 414-40

FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (0)9 68 24 020

U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical Instruments Co. L.L.C. Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg., No. 14, Ground Floor, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: (04) 3360715

NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D'Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago.#503 Managua, Nicaragua TEL: (505)277-2557

BARBADOS
A&B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados TEL: (246)430-1100

UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd. Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (01792) 702701

INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. 411, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai-400011, INDIA TEL: (022) 2493 9051

GERMANY
Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt, GERMANY TEL: (040) 52 60090

BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda. Rua San Jose, 211 Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL TEL: (011) 4615 5666

PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA TEL: 315-0101

NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd. (Head Office) 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL: (604) 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd. (Toronto Office) 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL: (905) 362 9707

INDONESIA
PT Citra IntiRama Jl. Cideng Timur No. 15J-15O Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL: (021) 6324170

GREECE/CYPRUS
STOLLAS S.A. Music Sound Light 155, New National Road Patras 26442, GREECE TEL: 2610 435400

MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores No.1231&1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931, Manama 339 BAHRAIN TEL: 17 813 942

CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A. Rut.: 96.919.420-1 Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor Santiago - Centro, CHILE TEL: (02) 688-9540

PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL: (595) 21 492147

KOREA
Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho-Dong, Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA TEL: (02) 3486-8855

HUNGARY
Roland East Europe Ltd. Warehouse Area DEPO Pf.83 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (23) 511011

COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda. Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin, Colombia TEL: (574)3812529

PERU
Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima - Peru TEL: (511) 4461388

IRAN
MOCO INC. No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave., Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran, IRAN TEL: (021)-2285-4169

MALAYSIA
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd. 45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39, Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA TEL: (03) 7805-3263

IRELAND
Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park, Calmount Avenue, Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL: (01) 4294444

U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938, U. S. A. TEL: (323) 890 3700

COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, San Jose, COSTA RICA TEL: 258-0211

TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W.I. TEL: (868) 638 6385

ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Ltd. 8 Retzif Ha'alia Hashnia St. Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL TEL: (03) 6823666

VIET NAM
VIET THUONG CORPORATION 386 CACH MANG THANG TAM ST. DIST.3, HO CHI MINH CITY VIET NAM TEL: 9316540

ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A. Viale delle Industrie 8, 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY TEL: (02) 937-78300

As of Jan. 1, 2009 (ROLAND)

Cover1,4